RTN 950 Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)-(V100R003C00_02)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C00

Commissioning Guide (Web LCT) Issue

02

Date

2011-01-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

About This Document

About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 950

V100R003C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT

V100R003C00

Intended Audience This document describes the installation process, including Preparations for the Commissioning, Site commissioning, system commissioning of the OptiX RTN 950. The intended audience of this document are: Installation and Commissioning Engineer

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-01-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C00 This document is the second issue for the V100R003C00 product version. Compared with the first issue, the content updates are as follows. Section

Description

5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link

Added the IF boards that support testing of the fade margin.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C00 This document is the first issue for the V100R003C00 version.

iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Contents

Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols..........................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................1-4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.....................................................................................................................1-7 1.5 Storage Batteries.............................................................................................................................................1-7 1.6 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................1-9 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers..................................................................................................................1-9 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure....................................................................................................................1-11 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas...................................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.4 Laser.....................................................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.5 Microwave............................................................................................................................................1-13 1.7 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................1-13 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.......................................................................................................................1-13 1.7.2 Using Ladders......................................................................................................................................1-14 1.8 Mechanical Safety.........................................................................................................................................1-16 1.9 Other Precautions..........................................................................................................................................1-17

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations............................................................................................2-1 2.1 Operation Guide to the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Operation Guide to the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Operation Guide to the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................2-5 2.4 Operation Guide to the IF Board.....................................................................................................................2-6

3 Commissioning Preparations...................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Commissioning Process..................................................................................................................................3-2 3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process..................................................................................................................3-2 3.1.2 System Commissioning Process.............................................................................................................3-4 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method.......................................................................................................3-6 3.3 Documents and Tools Preparation..................................................................................................................3-6 3.4 Commissioning Conditions Check..................................................................................................................3-8 3.4.1 Site Commissioning Conditions Check..................................................................................................3-8 3.4.2 System Commissioning Conditions Check............................................................................................3-8 Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Contents

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning...................................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Powering On the Equipment...........................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Configuring the Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT...............................................................4-4 4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU.................................................................................................... 4-9 4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.........................................................................................4-11 4.2.3 Logging In to an NE.............................................................................................................................4-13 4.2.4 Changing the NE ID.............................................................................................................................4-14 4.2.5 Changing the NE Name........................................................................................................................4-14 4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................4-15 4.2.7 Configuring the Logical Board............................................................................................................4-16 4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................4-17 4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................4-18 4.2.10 Synchronizing NE Time.....................................................................................................................4-20 4.2.11 Configuring the Orderwire.................................................................................................................4-20 4.2.12 Checking Alarms................................................................................................................................4-21 4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Hand-Held Tool........................................................4-22 4.3.1 Connecting the Hand-Held Tool to the IDU........................................................................................4-22 4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes...........................................................................................................................4-24 4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link....................................................................................................................4-27 4.3.4 Checking Alarms..................................................................................................................................4-31 4.4 Testing Connectivity of the Cables...............................................................................................................4-32 4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of the E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT..........................................................4-32 4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Hand-Held Tool......................................................4-34 4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of the Ethernet Cables........................................................................................4-35 4.4.4 Checking Optical Fiber Connection.....................................................................................................4-36 4.5 Aligning the Antennas...................................................................................................................................4-38 4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobe....................................................................................................................4-38 4.5.2 Aligning the Single-Polarized Antennas .............................................................................................4-41 4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas......................................................................................................4-44 4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links..............................................................................................................4-46 4.7 Querying the DCN Status..............................................................................................................................4-47

5 System Commissioning Guide................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Configuring the Network-wide Service Data..................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method........................................................................................... 5-4 5.1.2 Logging In to an NE...............................................................................................................................5-5 5.1.3 Changing the NE ID...............................................................................................................................5-6 5.1.4 Changing the NE Name..........................................................................................................................5-7 5.1.5 Setting NE Communication Parameters.................................................................................................5-8 5.1.6 Configuring the Logical Board.............................................................................................................. 5-9 5.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................5-10 5.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................5-11 5.1.9 Configuring the ATPC Attributes........................................................................................................5-12 vi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Contents

5.1.10 Synchronizing the NE Time...............................................................................................................5-13 5.1.11 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services..............................................................5-14 5.1.12 Configuring the Clock Sources..........................................................................................................5-15 5.1.13 Configuring the Orderwire.................................................................................................................5-16 5.2 Testing the E1 Service...................................................................................................................................5-17 5.2.1 Testing the E1 Service by Using a BER Tester...................................................................................5-18 5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS................................................................................................5-19 5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service.........................................................................................................................5-21 5.4 Testing the ATM Service..............................................................................................................................5-25 5.5 Testing the AM Switching............................................................................................................................5-27 5.5.1 Testing the AM Switching by Using a BER Tester.............................................................................5-27 5.5.2 Testing the AM Switching Without a BER Tester...............................................................................5-29 5.6 Testing the Protection Switching..................................................................................................................5-31 5.6.1 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching...............................................................................................................5-32 5.6.2 Testing the N+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................5-35 5.6.3 Testing the SNCP Switching................................................................................................................5-37 5.6.4 Testing the ERPS.................................................................................................................................5-41 5.6.5 Testing the MPLS APS Protection Switching......................................................................................5-43 5.6.6 Testing the Linear MSP Switching......................................................................................................5-45 5.7 Checking the Clock Status............................................................................................................................5-48 5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link................................................................................................................5-49 5.9 Testing the 24-Hour BER..............................................................................................................................5-52

6 Introduction to the Hand-Held Tool......................................................................................6-1 6.1 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Operation Interface..........................................................................................................................................6-2

7 Configuration Example of Service Data................................................................................7-1 7.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Board Configurations......................................................................................................................................7-2 7.3 Service Planning..............................................................................................................................................7-3 7.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................7-5

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane........................................................................8-1 8.1 Creating MDs..................................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Creating MAs..................................................................................................................................................8-3 8.3 Creating MPs...................................................................................................................................................8-4 8.4 Performing an LB Test....................................................................................................................................8-5

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1 A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...........................................................................................................A-3 A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE........................................................................................................A-4 A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_Changing NE IDs..............................................................................A-5 A.4 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting....................................................................A-5 A.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create............................................................................................................A-7 Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Contents

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A.6 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration.............................................................................A-10 A.7 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................................A-19 A.8 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................................A-21 A.9 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation...................................................................A-26 A.10 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table................................................................................A-28 A.11 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General..............................................................................................A-29 A.12 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced...........................................................................................A-31 A.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs...........................................................A-32 A.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs...........................................................A-33 A.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs............................................................A-34 A.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB..................................................................A-36

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1 B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................B-2 B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................B-2 B.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................B-11 B.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................B-16 B.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................B-22 B.6 U-Z............................................................................................................................................................... B-31

viii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Figures

Figures Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap............................................................................................................... 1-7 Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface..................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-3 Level optical interface......................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects......................................................................................................................1-14 Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder...............................................................................................................................1-15 Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof.............................................................................1-16 Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch............................................................................................................................ 2-2 Figure 4-1 Normal state........................................................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-2 Normal state........................................................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-3 Connecting the hand-held tool to the IDU........................................................................................4-23 Figure 4-4 Connecting the BER Tester..............................................................................................................4-33 Figure 4-5 Testing the Ethernet service cable....................................................................................................4-36 Figure 4-6 Connection diagram for checking the fiber jumper connection by using an optical interface board .............................................................................................................................................................................4-37 Figure 4-7 Main lobe and side lobe....................................................................................................................4-39 Figure 4-8 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna.............................................................................4-40 Figure 4-9 Three tracking paths.........................................................................................................................4-40 Figure 4-10 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe..................................................................................4-41 Figure 4-11 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter............................................................................4-43 Figure 4-12 HOP manage...................................................................................................................................4-48 Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER tester...............................................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing the Ethernet service.......................................................................5-21 Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of the ATM service.............................................5-26 Figure 5-4 Configuration for testing the IF 1+1 switching................................................................................5-32 Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing the N+1 protection...................................................................................5-35 Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing the SNCP switching.................................................................................5-38 Figure 5-7 Configuration for testing the ERPS..................................................................................................5-41 Figure 5-8 Connection diagram for testing the MPLS APS protection.............................................................5-44 Figure 5-9 Configuration for testing the Ethernet service..................................................................................5-46 Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I hand-held tool......................................................................6-3 Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type II hand-held tool.....................................................................6-3 Figure 7-1 Networking diagram ..........................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram .............................................................................................................7-3 Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Figures

Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram ..............................................................................................................7-4

x

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Tables

Tables Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950...........................................................................1-3 Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.............................................................3-2 Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using the hand-held tool......................................................3-4 Table 3-3 System commissioning process............................................................................................................3-5 Table 3-4 List of tools and meters........................................................................................................................3-7 Table 4-1 Fuse Current.........................................................................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 States of indicators...............................................................................................................................4-3 Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links................................................................................................7-3 Table 7-2 Information about IF boards.................................................................................................................7-4 Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information ........................................................................................................7-5 Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface.....................................................................................................A-32 Table A-2 Parameters on the main interface.....................................................................................................A-33 Table A-3 Parameters on the main interface.....................................................................................................A-34 Table A-4 Parameters for advanced attributes...................................................................................................A-35 Table A-5 Parameters on the main interface.....................................................................................................A-36

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

1

Safety Precautions

About This Chapter This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD. 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. 1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device. The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. l

Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.

l

Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device.

l

Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software).

l

The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. l

When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.

l

Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.

l

Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.

l

The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Human Safety

1-2

l

When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables.

l

When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

NOTE

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

l

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.

l

Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams.

l

Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn.

l

In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.

l

Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack.

l

When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.

l

When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.

l

After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

Device Safety

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 Symbol

Indication This symbol is for anti-static protection. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an anti-static wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board. This symbol is for the laser class.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may damage you eyes or skin.

LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Symbol

Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded.

ATTENTION 警告

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically.

CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

This symbol is for fan safety. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.

Thunderstorm The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

1-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

High Leakage Current

WARNING Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGER Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l

Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.

l

Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTION Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNING If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). l

The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.

l

Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

1-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. l

Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.

l

If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.

l

A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Basic Precautions To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l

Use special insulation tools.

l

Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.

l

Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte.

l

When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited.

l

Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately. 1-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Battery Leakage

CAUTION In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l

Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

l

Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.

1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers. 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. 1.6.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers. 1.6.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

DANGER When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment. The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l

Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.

l

Non-woven lens tissue

l

Special compressed gas

l

Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

l

Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent

l

Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibers l

Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power damages the optical interface.

l

Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port.

l

Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.

1-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting optical interface

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level optical interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. l

Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.

l

A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.

1.6.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection. Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and thus it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the eyes may be damaged. In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions: l

All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses.

l

Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.

l

Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

l

Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off.

l

Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off.

l

Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation.

l

Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: 1-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

l

Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

l

Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l

The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

l

Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down.

l

Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.

l

Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.

l

Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.7.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

WARNING When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects. l

Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

l

Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition.

l

Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity.

l

Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.

l

Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

1-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Checking Ladders l

Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder.

l

Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely. Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points: l

Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides.

l

Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.

l

Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-15

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. l

Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.

l

Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps.

l

Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.

l

Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.

1-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Fans l

When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.

l

When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

WARNING l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you. l

Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained.

l

When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l

Slide the board along the guide rails.

l

Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.

l

When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-17

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1 Safety Precautions

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements: l

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.

l

If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation.

l

Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNING Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

1-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

2

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

Guides to High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter This chapter provides guides to the operations that may cause injury on human bodies and damage on the equipment if they are misconducted during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment. 2.1 Operation Guide to the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch. When you turn on or turn off the toggle lever switch, perform the operations in strict compliance with the guidelines. Otherwise, the IF board may be damaged. 2.2 Operation Guide to the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR. Otherwise, the body injury may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged. 2.3 Operation Guide to the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR. Otherwise, the body injury may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged. 2.4 Operation Guide to the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR. Otherwise, the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

2.1 Operation Guide to the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch. When you turn on or turn off the toggle lever switch, perform the operations in strict compliance with the guidelines. Otherwise, the IF board may be damaged.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch The toggle lever switch resides on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

O: OFF

I : ON

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch 1.

2-2

Pull the toggle lever switch out slightly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

2.

Turn it to the left.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch 1.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Pull the toggle lever switch out slightly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

2.

Turn it to the right.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide to the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR. Otherwise, the body injury may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to the Toggle Lever Switch.

2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

1

2

DANGER Do not remove the IF jumper before the ODU is powered off! Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper. ----End

2.3 Operation Guide to the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR. Otherwise, the body injury may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

1

2

DANGER Do not remove or install the IF cable before the ODU is powered off! Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable. ----End

2.4 Operation Guide to the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR. Otherwise, the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to the Toggle Lever Switch.

2-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

1

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

2

3

3

DANGER Do not remove or install the IF board before the ODU is powered off! Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter Before commissioning the equipment, you must make the related preparations. The commissioning preparations to be made are as follows: 3.1 Commissioning Process Based on commissioning objects, the commissioning process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method When using the Web LCT for commissioning, the commissioning engineer can adopt the singlehop commissioning method or network commissioning method. 3.3 Documents and Tools Preparation To commission the equipment smoothly, you must make the related documents and tools available. 3.4 Commissioning Conditions Check Before performing the site commissioning and system commissioning, check whether the equipment meets the commissioning requirements.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3 Commissioning Preparations

3.1 Commissioning Process Based on commissioning objects, the commissioning process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. 3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process Site commissioning involves the commissioning of a hop of radio link and the sites at both ends of the radio link. The purpose of site commissioning is to ensure that the sites and the radio link between the sites works normally, to prepare for system commissioning. 3.1.2 System Commissioning Process System commissioning involves the commissioning of the entire radio transmission network. The purpose of system commissioning is to ensure that various services are transmitted normally and protection functions are realized over the radio transmission network.

3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process Site commissioning involves the commissioning of a hop of radio link and the sites at both ends of the radio link. The purpose of site commissioning is to ensure that the sites and the radio link between the sites works normally, to prepare for system commissioning. In the case of the OptiX RTN 950, the following methods of site commissioning are available: l

Using the Web LCT to configure data on site

l

Using the hand-held tool to configure data on site NOTE

When using the hand-held tool, you can only commission basic items.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT) Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on site when the following conditions are met: l

Commissioning engineers are capable of configuring radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.

l

Commissioning engineers are aware of the radio link data planning for the site.

l

Commissioning engineers have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering On the Equipment

Required

Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT

3-2

Connecting the Web LCT

Required

Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

Required

Log in to an NE

Required

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Item

Testing Connectivity of the Cables

Aligning Antennasa

Remarks Changing the NE ID

Required

Changing the Name of an NE

Optional

Setting the Communication Parameters of an NE

Required

Configuring Logical Boards

Required

Configuring IF 1+1 protection

Optional

Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link

Required

Synchronizing NE Time

Required

Configuring orderwire

Optional

Checking Alarms

Required

Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables (by Using the Web LCT)

Required when E1 cables are used on the site

Testing connectivity of Ethernet cables

Required when Ethernet cables are used on the site

Testing connectivity of optical fibers

Required when optical fibers are used on the site

Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas

Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas

Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas

Querying the Status of Radio Links

Required

Querying the DCN status

Required

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, you must power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Hand-Held Tool) Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the hand-held tool on site when the following conditions are met: l

Commissioning engineers are capable of configuring radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.

l

Commissioning engineers are aware of the radio link data planning for the site.

l

Commissioning engineers have the hand-held tool.

Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using the hand-held tool Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering On the Equipment

Required

Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Hand-Held Tool

Testing Connectivity of the Cables

Aligning Antennasa

Connecting the Hand-Held Tool to the IDU

Required

Setting NE Attributes

Required

Configure a radio link

Required

Checking Alarms

Required

Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the HandHeld Tool

Required when E1 cables are used on the site

Testing connectivity of Ethernet cables

Required when Ethernet cables are used on the site

Testing connectivity of optical fibers

Required when optical fibers are used on the site

Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas

Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas

Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, you must power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.

3.1.2 System Commissioning Process System commissioning involves the commissioning of the entire radio transmission network. The purpose of system commissioning is to ensure that various services are transmitted normally and protection functions are realized over the radio transmission network. 3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Table 3-3 System commissioning process Commissioning Item

Remarks

Configuring the Network-wide Service Data

Required

Testing the E1 Service

Testing the E1 Service by Using a BER Tester

Required when the E1 service is available and a BER tester is available on site

Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS

Required when the E1 service is available and no BER tester is available on site

Testing the Ethernet Service

Required when the Ethernet service is available

Testing the ATM Service

Required when the ATM service is available

Testing the AM Switching

Testing the AM Switching by Using a BER Tester

Required when the AM function is enabled and a BER tester is available on site

Testing the AM Switching Without a BER Tester

Required when the AM function is enabled and no BER tester is available on site

Testing the IF 1+1 Switching

Required when the radio links are configured with the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD

Testing N+1 Protection Switching

Required when the N+1 protection is configured

Testing the SNCP Switching

Required when the SNCP is configured

Testing the ERPS Protection Switching

Required when the ERPS protection is configured

Testing the MPLS APS Protection Switching

Required when the MPLS APS protection is configured

Testing the Linear MSP Switching

Required when the 1+1/1:N linear MSP is configured

Testing the Protection Switching

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Checking the Clock Status

Required

Testing the FM over a Radio Link

Optional

Testing the 24-Hour BER

Required when the E1 service is available

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3 Commissioning Preparations

3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method When using the Web LCT for commissioning, the commissioning engineer can adopt the singlehop commissioning method or network commissioning method. NOTE

l Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of a hop of radio link and the sites at both ends of the radio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site. l System commissioning refers to the commissioning of all the NEs in the network, and then the configuration of the commissioning data for each site by connecting the commissioning tool to the gateway NE.

Single-hop Commissioning On a small-scale microwave transmission network (for example, only one or two hops of radio link), the single-hop commissioning method is preferred. By performing NE commissioning, you can complete all commissioning items on one NE at a time. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1.

On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.

2.

Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.

4.

Complete the system commissioning items.

Network Commissioning On a large-scale microwave transmission network, the network commissioning method applies. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1.

On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.

2.

Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT or configure site commissioning data by using the hand-held data.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items at the site where services converge.

4.

Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items at the site where services converge.

3.3 Documents and Tools Preparation To commission the equipment smoothly, you must make the related documents and tools available.

Documents Before commissioning the equipment, you must make the following documents available: l

Engineering design documents, including: – Network Planning – Engineering Design

3-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

l

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning guide documents, including: – OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide – OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

Tools Table 3-4 lists the tools required for the commissioning task. Table 3-4 List of tools and meters Tool and Meter

Application Scenario

Adjustable wrench, screwdriver, telescope, intercom, socket-head wrench, multimeter and a test cable with a BNC connector at one end, and north-stabilized indicator

Aligning the antennas

Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed

l Configuring the site commissioning data by using the Web LCT l Testing Connectivity of the E1 Cables l Querying the DCN Status

Hand-held tool

l Configuring site commissioning data l Testing Connectivity of the E1 Cables l Testing Connectivity of the E1 Cables

BER tester

l Testing the E1 Service by Using a BER Tester l Testing the AM Switching by Using a BER Tester l Testing the IF 1+1 Switching l Testing the N+1 Protection Switching l Testing the SNCP Switching l Testing the Linear MSP Switching l Testing the 24-Hour BER Network cable tester

Testing Connectivity of the Ethernet Cables

Optical power meter, short fiber jumper

Checking Optical Fiber Connection

PC on which the Web LCT is installed

Completing the system commissioning items by using the Web LCT

E1 jumper

Testing the 24-Hour BER

NOTE

For the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web LCT User Guide.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

3 Commissioning Preparations

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3.4 Commissioning Conditions Check Before performing the site commissioning and system commissioning, check whether the equipment meets the commissioning requirements. 3.4.1 Site Commissioning Conditions Check Before performing the site commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather. 3.4.2 System Commissioning Conditions Check Before performing the system commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather.

3.4.1 Site Commissioning Conditions Check Before performing the site commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather. The site commissioning conditions are listed as follows: l

The hardware installation must be complete and pass the installation check.

l

The power for the equipment must be available.

l

The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment must be routed as required.

l

The site conditions and antenna commissioning engineers must meet the requirements for operations at heights.

l

The weather must be favorable and the commissioning is free from the impacts of wind, rain, snow or fog.

3.4.2 System Commissioning Conditions Check Before performing the system commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather. The system commissioning conditions are listed as follows:

3-8

l

The site commissioning at both ends of the radio link must be complete.

l

The weather must be favorable and the commissioning is free from the impacts of wind, rain, snow or fog.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

4

Site Commissioning

About This Chapter Site commissioning provides the specific commissioning process for all site commissioning items. 4.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the process of powering on equipment, you can check whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are normal. 4.2 Configuring the Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure the site commissioning data when you use the Web LCT to perform the site commissioning. 4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Hand-Held Tool This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the hand-held tool. 4.4 Testing Connectivity of the Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly, or the hardware may become faulty. To ensure that the services run normally, you need to test connectivity of the cables. 4.5 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning, and its result has a direct effect on the performance of the radio link. 4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas, you need to query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are normal. 4.7 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. Querying the radio links through the HOP management, you can check whether the DCN of radio links runs normally.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

4.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the process of powering on equipment, you can check whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are normal.

Prerequisite l

The hardware installation must be complete and pass the installation check.

l

The power system is ready. The voltage, pole connection, and the fuse current of the power system are checked in the process of connecting the power cables.

l

The power supply (for example, the power box of the cabinet) must be turned off.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials None.

Context l

In the case of OptiX RTN 950, the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 4-1. Table 4-1 Fuse Current

l

Chassis

Fuse Current

OptiX RTN 950

≥ 20 A

The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control, switching, and timing board: Chassis

Board Type

OptiX RTN 950

CSH/CST

Precautions

CAUTION l If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards, the two PIU boards must be provided with the input power of the same nominal voltage. l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with locking devices. Hence, you must pull out the switches gently before you turn it. If the switch points to "O", you can infer that the switch is turned off. If the switch points to "I", you can infer that the switch is turned on. l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet the test requirements, reconstruct the power supply and do not power on the cabinet.

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 Check and ensure that the power cable connections of the chassis are correct. Then, power on the equipment and observe the indicators. In the normal case, the PIU and FAN indicators are steady green, as shown in Figure 4-1. Otherwise, handle the anomalies according to Table 4-2. Table 4-2 States of indicators Indicator

State

Description

PWR

Steady green

Indicates that the power supply is normal.

Off

Indicates a power failure.

Steady green

Indicates that the fan is running normally.

Steady red

Indicates that the fan is faulty.

Off

Indicates that the fan is powered off.

FAN

Figure 4-1 Normal state the PIU indicator the FAN indicator

Step 2 Observe the indicators on the system control, switching, and timing board and ensure that the equipment is powered on normally. The board indicators should be in the following states and sequences. 1.

The PROG indicator should be green, off, flash green, and off. The process lasts about 1 minute. NOTE

This is the case if the service data is not configured. If the service data is configured, this process lasts longer.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

2.

The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green.

STAT PROG SYNC ACTX ACTC

Figure 4-2 Normal state

NOTE

l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU Hardware Description. l In the case of a board except the system control, switching, and timing board on the IDU, the STAT indicator is on only after the corresponding logical board is added.

Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I". NOTE

l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of IF board connected to the ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created. l In the case of any indicator anomaly, contact Huawei engineers.

----End

4.2 Configuring the Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure the site commissioning data when you use the Web LCT to perform the site commissioning. 4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Configuration Procedure Step

Action

Description

1

Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU

Mandatory.

2

Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

It is recommended that you perform this operation when you need to create NEs by using the centralized NMS. Set the parameters as follows: Domain: When the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP address of the GNE as the search domain. In the case of initial configuration, it is recommended that you set the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain.

3

Logging In to an NE

Mandatory. Set the parameters as follows: Set User Name and Password to correct values. The default User Name is lct and the default Password is password.

4

Changing the ID of an NE

Mandatory. Set the parameters as follows: l Change ID to the NE ID specified during the planning of the DCN. l If the extended NE ID is required, change Extended ID.

5

Changing the Name of an NE

Optional.

6

Setting the Communication Parameters of an NE

Mandatory. Set the parameters as follows: l In the case of the GNE, set IP Address and Subnet Mask according to the planning of the external DCN. l In the case of the GNE, set Gateway IP Address if the external DCN requires. l In the case of non-GNEs, it is recommended that you set IP Address to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID is 0x090001, set IP Address to 129.9.0.1. Set Subnet Mask to 255.255.0.0. NOTE If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address changes according to the NE ID and is always 0x81000000 + NE ID. In this case, the IP address of a non-GNE does not need to be changed manually.

7

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Configuring Logical Boards

Mandatory.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step

Action

Description

8

Creating IF 1+1 Protection

This is required when the radio links are configured with 1+1 protection. Parameters are set according to the network planning.

4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step

Action

Description

9

4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

Mandatory. l – In the case of the TDM microwave, set the main parameters as follows: – Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network planning information. – Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX Power (dBm) according to the network planning information. – Set TX Status to unmute. – Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network planning information. The antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is beyond the range of preset receive power (-3 dBm), the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna non-alignment indication function. NOTE l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. l In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. l In the case of TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step

Action

Description l In the case of the Integrated IP radio, set the main parameters as follows: – Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network planning information. – set AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is planned. – Set Guarantee E1 Capacity and Link ID according to the network planning information. – Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX Power (dBm) according to the network planning information. – Set TX Status to unmute. – Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network planning information. The antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is beyond the range of preset receive power (-3 dBm), the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna non-alignment indication function.

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Step

Action

4 Site Commissioning

Description NOTE l In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.

10

Synchronizing NE Time

Mandatory. During the site commissioning, you only need to synchronize the NE with the NMS.

11

Configuring the Orderwire

Optional.

12

Checking Alarms

Mandatory.

NOTE

l After commissioning the site, reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. l If the Integrated IP radio uses the XPIC function, consider the XPIC workgroup as two independent Integrated IP radio links and configure the two radio links separately.

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration and for other commissioning items.

Prerequisite The equipment must be powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system. Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop. The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements: Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

l The IP address of the laptop and the IP address of the NE should be in the same network segment (the default network segment is 129.9.0.0), and the IP address of the laptop is different from the IP address of the NE. l The subnet mask of the IP address of the laptop should be the same as the subnet mask of the IP address of the NE (the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0). l The default gateway is null. Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

NMS/COM

CAUTION Ensure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and the NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Otherwise, the equipment or test tool may be damaged. NOTE

The NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board is a self-adaptive port for crossover cables and straight through cables. Thus, a straight through cable can also be used to make the connection. For the wire sequences of crossover cables and straight through cables, see Network Cable in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description.

In this case, the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). If the operating system on the laptop allows the prompt for local connections, the prompt that the network has been connected is displayed. If the operating system displays the prompt indicating the collision of IP addresses, change the IP address. Step 4 Optional: Set the IE to the default browser. Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the IE to medium or lower. Step 6 Optional: Disable the interception function for pop-up windows. NOTE

If the other plug-ins also intercept pop-up windows, disable the interception function.

Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the IE.

4-10

1.

Run the IE.

2.

Choose Tool > Internet Options in the tool bar of the IE.

3.

On the Common tab, click Settings in the Internet Temporaries box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

4.

In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and then click OK.

5.

Click OK.

Step 8 On desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon. The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password, and then click Login. l User Name: admin l Password: admin If the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in the IE.

----End

4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the Web LCT can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisite l

The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In NE List, click NE Search. Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select the search mode. Step 3 Optional: If Search Mode is set to Search NE, you need to set the network segment. 1.

Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.

2.

Optional: Click Add, and set Domain and Domain Address to add a network segment.

3.

Optional: Select an existing network segment, and click Modify to modify the network segment.

4.

Optional: Select an existing network segment, and click Delete to delete the network segment. NOTE

During initial configuration, Domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. After the gateway NE IP address of the searched NE is changed, you need to change the value of Domain. The default network segment cannot be modified and deleted.

Step 4 Click Search. Step 5 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

Step 6 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully. Step 7 Click OK. A new NE is already added to the NE list.

4-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 8 Click Cancel. ----End

4.2.3 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The NEs to be managed must be created in the NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login. TIP

You can select more than one NE at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

l The default User Name is lct. l The default Password of user lct is password. Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE. Step 3 Click NE Explorer. The NE Explorer is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list. TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout diagram. l Click

to fold/unfold the legend.

----End

Related References A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE

4.2.4 Changing the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering planning to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 4 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. ----End

Related References A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_Changing NE IDs

4.2.5 Changing the NE Name To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE. 4-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in Name. NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any space or Chinese characters.

Step 3 Click Apply. ----End

4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply. NOTE

When you configure multiple parameters, click Apply respectively.

----End

Related References A.4 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

4.2.7 Configuring the Logical Board If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

All the boards must be installed correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards. Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required but still not be configured for certain physical boards. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then select Add XXX. XXX is the name of the board to be added. Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then select Delete. 1.

A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK.

2.

A dialog box is displayed again for confirmation, click OK.

NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the board.

----End

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1 +1 protection group.

Prerequisite l Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.

l

The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection through the configuration of the IF 1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

Step 5 Click Apply. ----End

Related References A.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link, you can configure the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link.

Prerequisite

4-18

l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Precautions l

In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main device.

l

In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the active device and the ODU information of the standby device.

l

In the case of one XPIC radio link, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. The IF/ODU information of the two radio links in different polarization directions should be separately configured.

l

In the case of N+1 radio links, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radio links and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links should be configured respectively.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link. Step 7 Click Apply. ----End Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Related References A.6 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

4.2.10 Synchronizing NE Time Adjust the NE time so that the NE time remains synchronized with the time on the NMS. In this manner, the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal event occurs.

Prerequisite l

The basic data of NEs on the entire network must be configured.

l

Time setting on the Web LCT must be correct.

l

The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

----End

4.2.11 Configuring the Orderwire The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

4-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire. 1.

Click the Advanced tab.

2.

Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

3.

Click Apply.

----End

Related References A.11 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.12 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

4.2.12 Checking Alarms By checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can check whether the equipment is working properly.

Prerequisite l

The equipment must be connected to the Web LCT.

l

Data configuration must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click

in the toolbar.

Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab. Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information. Check whether there are equipment alarms, particularly the following alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details on the previous alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. ----End

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Hand-Held Tool This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the hand-held tool. 4.3.1 Connecting the Hand-Held Tool to the IDU The hand-held tool needs to be connected to the IDU before data configuration. 4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes Setting NE attributes includes setting NE ID, NE IP, and NE name. 4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link To configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information and protection modes of the radio link. 4.3.4 Checking Alarms By checking the alarms generated on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment is working properly.

4.3.1 Connecting the Hand-Held Tool to the IDU The hand-held tool needs to be connected to the IDU before data configuration.

Prerequisite The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Hand-held tool

Procedure Step 1 Use appropriate cables to connect the hand-held tool to the OptiX RTN 950, as shown in Figure 4-3. 4-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-3 Connecting the hand-held tool to the IDU

Hand-held tool NMS/COM port on the CSH, CST board MINI USB port

DB9-female

DB9-male

RJ-45 connector

Step 2 Press the Power button on the hand-held tool until the hand-held tool starts. Two seconds later, the login window is displayed.

Step 3 Press Up or Down button to log in to the local NE or another NE, and then press Enter.

Step 4 Optional: If you select to log in to another NE, enter the basic NE ID and extended NE ID. 1.

Enter the extended NE ID, and then press Enter.

2.

Enter the basic NE ID, and then press Enter.

3.

Ensure that the NE ID is correct, and then press Enter.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

If the input basic NE ID or extended NE ID is incorrect, press the C button to return to the upper-level menu and rectify it.

Step 5 The hand-held tool is logged in to the system automatically and queries the NE information. The information about the queried slot is displayed in the standby window.

NOTE

l If the Login Fail ! message is displayed in the login window, the hand-held tool starts another login attempt until login succeeds. l Login is completed automatically and may last a long period. Do not press any button in the login process. Otherwise, the system stops the login process. l In the standby window, the hand-held tool relogs in to the system any time you press the 0 button. l If the Abnormal Connection message is displayed in the standby window, check the physical connection between the hand-held tool and the NE. Ensure that the connection is normal and then relog in to the system. l The upward arrow in the upper right corner of the standby interface indicates the status of the physical connection. If the arrow blinks regularly, the connection is normal. Otherwise, relog in to the system according to the prompt message of the system.

----End

4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes Setting NE attributes includes setting NE ID, NE IP, and NE name.

Prerequisite The hand-held tool is logged in to the NE. NOTE

In the case of the Integrated IP radio, the AM function is disabled by default on the hand-held tool.

Procedure Step 1 When the hand-held tool displays the standby window, press F2 to configure NE attributes.

4-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 2 Set NE name. 1.

Select 1-NE name and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2.

Set the NE name according to network planning. NOTE

l Only the first 11 characters of the NE name can be displayed on the interface. l An NE name can contain a maximum of 21 characters currently. You can press F1 to shift between different symbols.

3.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 3 Configure NE ID and extended ID. 1.

Select 2-NE ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2.

Set NE ID according to the network planning.

3.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

4.

Select 3-Ext-ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

5.

Set the extended ID according to the network planning.

6.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 4 Configure NE IP, subnet mask, and gateway NE. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

1.

Select 5-IP and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2.

Set NE IP according to the network planning. NOTE

The IP address is composed of four fields. After you finish one field, press Enter to enter the next field.

3.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

4.

Select 6-MSK and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

5.

Set the subnet mask according to the network planning.

6.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

7.

Select 7-GNE and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

8.

Set the gate NE according to the network planning.

9.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 5 Select 8-APPLY, and press Enter to save the data. The Confirm Configure ? dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select YES and press Enter to save the data. Then, the system starts saving the previous configuration. NOTE

l In the configuration process, you can press C to return to the previous menu. l After the system saves the configuration, it automatically backs up the database and the backup operation lasts 30 to 60 seconds. You need to check the backup result. l If you change NE ID or extended ID in the configuration process, the hand-held tool automatically relogs in to the system after the system successfully backs up the updated data. Then, the standby interface is displayed. If the system fails in backing up the updated data, the active configuration interface is displayed.

----End

4-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link To configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information and protection modes of the radio link.

Prerequisite The hand-held tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure Step 1 When the hand-held tool displays the standby window, press F1 to configure IF attributes.

NOTE

By default, the system displays the information about the radio link carried by the IF board in the slot with the smallest number.

Step 2 Select the required IF board. 1.

Select 1-Board and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2.

Select the online IF board.

3.

Press Enter to return to the previous menu. NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1.

Select 7-Protection and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF 1+1 protection modes is displayed.

2.

Select an IF 1+1 protection mode according to the network planning. When you configure IF 1+1 protection with the hand-held tool, the default main/standby IF boards are as follows:

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

3.

Link ID

Slot of main IF board

Slot of standby IF board

1

1

2

2

3

5

3

4

6

Press Enter to return to the previous menu. NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

Step 4 Configuring IF information for a radio link 1.

4-28

Select 5-BandWidth and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed. a. Select a working mode for the ISU2/ISX2 board by pressing the Up and Down keys. Then, press Enter. The configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed.

b. If you select 1-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native E1+ETH) mode. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

c. If you select 2-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native STM-1+ETH) mode. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

d. If you select 3-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in SDH mode. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

2.

Select the IF bandwidth according to the network planning.

3.

Press Enter to return to the previous menu. NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

4.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Select 6-Modulate and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of modulation modes is displayed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, interfaces for selecting modulation modes are IF bandwidth-specific.

5.

Select the modulation mode according to the network planning.

6.

Press Enter to return to the previous menu. NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

Step 5 Configure the ODU information of an NE. 1.

Select 2-Frequency and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit frequencies is displayed.

2.

Enter the value of transmit frequency (MHz) according to the network planning. NOTE

l Press the F1 key to enter a point. l If the ODU is online, the system displays the frequency range that the ODU supports.

3.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

4.

Select 3-TRSpacing and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of T/R spacing is displayed.

5.

Enter the value of T/R spacing (MHz) according to the network planning. NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

6.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

7.

Select 4-TX Power and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit power is displayed.

8.

Enter the value of transmit power (dBm) according to the network planning. NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

9. 4-30

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 6 Select 8 APPLY and press Enter to confirm the configuration. The system starts delivering the configuration. After the configuration is delivered, the last line of the system interface displays Any Key To Continue. Step 7 Press any key to continue. After the configuration data is saved, the current configuration interface is automatically displayed. NOTE

The waiting time is about 30 to 60 seconds.

----End

4.3.4 Checking Alarms By checking the alarms generated on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment is working properly.

Prerequisite The hand-held tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure Step 1 When the hand-held tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

Step 2 Select 5-Current Alarm Query and press Enter. Then, the query interface is displayed.

TIP

You can press the Up or Down button to check the query result about OptiX RTN 950.

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information. Check whether there are equipment alarms, particularly the following alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-31

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details on the previous alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. ----End

4.4 Testing Connectivity of the Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly, or the hardware may become faulty. To ensure that the services run normally, you need to test connectivity of the cables. 4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of the E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT By testing the connectivity of the E1 cable, you can check whether the connection of the E1 cable between the equipment and the DDF is correct, and whether the E1 cable itself is normal. 4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Hand-Held Tool By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipment and the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When performing site commissioning with the hand-held tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables through the PRBS function enabled on the NE. 4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of the Ethernet Cables By testing the connectivity of the Ethernet cable, you can check whether the Ethernet cable itself is normal. 4.4.4 Checking Optical Fiber Connection During the installation of fiber jumpers, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be very high. As a result, the services may fail to run normally. To prevent this situation, check the fiber jumper connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution frame (ODF). This topic mainly describes how to test the fiber jumper connection by using the optical interface on a certain board.

4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of the E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT By testing the connectivity of the E1 cable, you can check whether the connection of the E1 cable between the equipment and the DDF is correct, and whether the E1 cable itself is normal.

Prerequisite The equipment must be equipped with an E1 interface board, and the E1 port must travel through the DDF before being connected to another device.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

4-32

l

Web LCT

l

BER tester Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 At the DDF, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU. The BER tester displays the AIS alarm. Figure 4-4 Connecting the BER Tester DDF RX TX

RX

TX

. .. .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 Set the corresponding E1 port to Outloop through the Web LCT. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Outloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 3 Observe the BER tester. The BER tester should not display the AIS alarm any more. Step 4 Release the outloop set in Step 2. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 5 Observe the BER tester. The BER tester should report the AIS alarm. Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 to test all the other E1 ports. ----End Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-33

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Hand-Held Tool By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipment and the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When performing site commissioning with the hand-held tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables through the PRBS function enabled on the NE.

Prerequisite l

The NE houses an E1 interface board, and the E1 port travels through the DDF before being connected to another device.

l

The hand-held tool is logged in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Hand-held tool

Procedure Step 1 Connect the hand-held tool to the OptiX RTN 950. For details, see 4.3.1 Connecting the HandHeld Tool to the IDU. Step 2 On the DDF, perform a hardware loopback at the first E1 port on the IDU. DDF RX TX

. .. .

1 2 3 4

Step 3 Test the cable connectivity of the first port with the hand-held tool.

4-34

1.

When the hand-held tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

2.

Select 6-E1 Cable Check and press Enter. Then, the tributary board configuration interface is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

3.

Select the tributary board that is connected to the E1 port, and press Enter to test cable connectivity.

4.

Check the test result. Port 1 does not fail.

5.

Press any button to display the NE information query interface.

Step 4 Release the hardware loopback that is performed in Step 2. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to test cable connectivity at the other ports. ----End

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of the Ethernet Cables By testing the connectivity of the Ethernet cable, you can check whether the Ethernet cable itself is normal.

Prerequisite The Ethernet service cables must be prepared.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Network cable tester

Background Information You can also test the connectivity of the network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports (this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the Ethernet cable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports are on, it indicates that the Ethernet cable is normal. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-35

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 Connect the Ethernet service cable to the port of the network cable tester. Figure 4-5 Testing the Ethernet service cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester. Network Cable

End A

End B

Straight through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Crossover cable

The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Step 3 Connect the Ethernet cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device. ----End

4.4.4 Checking Optical Fiber Connection During the installation of fiber jumpers, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be very high. As a result, the services may fail to run normally. To prevent this situation, check the fiber jumper connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution frame (ODF). This topic mainly describes how to test the fiber jumper connection by using the optical interface on a certain board.

Prerequisite The fiber jumper must be installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF. The equipment must be powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Optical power meter, short fiber jumper 4-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Precautions

DANGER When you check the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams.

Connection Diagram for the Check When you use an optical interface board to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port of the optical interface board on the chassis side. Figure 4-6 shows the connection. Figure 4-6 Connection diagram for checking the fiber jumper connection by using an optical interface board

External Cable

TX

RX

ODF

Fiber jumper connected to the TX port

Procedure Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of an optical interface board. Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the OUT port of the optical interface board with a short fiber jumper. Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the optical interface type. The measured launched optical power of the optical interface board is A. Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back to the TX port. Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter. The measured optical power is B. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-37

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the corresponding TX port of the optical interface board. The optical power meter reads "LO" and does not receive optical signals. Step 7 Compare the values of A and B. l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range. l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, check and ensure that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, check and ensure that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

CAUTION If the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B should be less than 2 dB. Otherwise, you can infer that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation of the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. Check and ensure that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, check and ensure that the fiber jumper terminal is clean. Step 8 Check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port in the same manner. Step 9 Recover the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and on the ODF side. Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 to 9 to check fiber jumper connections of the other optical interfaces. ----End

4.5 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning, and its result has a direct effect on the performance of the radio link. 4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobe Before you align the antenna, you should be familiar with the related knowledge of the main lobe and side lobe. 4.5.2 Aligning the Single-Polarized Antennas When you align the single-polarized antennas, you need to align the main lobes of the antenna by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. 4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas When you align dual-polarized antennas, align the main lobe of the antenna signals by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. You also need to adjust the feed booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specified requirements.

4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobe Before you align the antenna, you should be familiar with the related knowledge of the main lobe and side lobe. 4-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobe The electric field strength of the radiated power of the antenna varies in space. The differences of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontal azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the vertical section. Figure 4-7 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein the first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna. Figure 4-7 Main lobe and side lobe

Main lobe First side lobe Second side lobe

Locating the Main Lobe The antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna aligned with the main lobe of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the opposite antenna reach the maximum value. The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, that is, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at the working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9° when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe. Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall of signal level. Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak. Figure 4-8 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-39

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-8 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna 180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe Outer edge of the main lobe, 3-10 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the main lobe and the first side lobe, 30 dB lower than the main lobe First side lobe, 20-25 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the first side lobe and the second side lobe, 30 dB or more lower than the main lobe Second side lobe, where signals are very weak

180o

90o

0o a Horizontal section of the antenna

b head-on view

Tracking Path Side lobe signal readings can be mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 4-9 shows a horizontal radio propagation model of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU.) Figure 4-9 Three tracking paths Head-on view of tracking paths for different elevations

Signal levels for each path 6 7

B A

7

6

C

C'

5

4 1

2

C

B' 3

C'

5

4

B'

B

A'

2 1 A

4-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 A'

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

l

Line AA' represents that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l

Line BB' represents that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe. The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l

Line CC' represents that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result, points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown in Figure 4-10, a common error is to move the antenna left to right along line DD', or top to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9 until the peak signal appears. Figure 4-10 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe E 1

D

2

1

D'

D D' 1

3

2

3

E

E'

E'

4.5.2 Aligning the Single-Polarized Antennas When you align the single-polarized antennas, you need to align the main lobes of the antenna by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisite l

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link must be complete. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-41

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

l

The weather must be suitable for outdoor work. There should be no rain, snow or fog between stations.

l

The on-site conditions must meet the requirements for the antenna to operate at a high altitude and the personnel required to commission the antenna must be trained to work at high altitudes.

l

The ATPC Function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

l

The AM Function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Adjustable wrench

l

Telescope, interphone, and socket-head wrench

l

Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests), and north-stabilized indicator.

l

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end, power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennas are aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends.

l

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas as follows:

Precautions

l

1.

Power on the main ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during the alignment.

2.

Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends.

3.

Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.

4.

Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align the antenna as follows: 1.

At both ends, power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align the main antennas.

2.

At both ends, power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align the diversity antennas.

CAUTION You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the related nuts or screws. For details, see the related installation guide.

Procedure Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position. Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at the local end and test the voltage value VBNC. 4-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

TIP

It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance because it is more convenient to test the voltage value VBNC.

Figure 4-11 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows: 1.

Keep the remote antenna fixed.

2.

Use the multimeter to measure the VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in the horizontal direction. When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows: l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 4-9. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9. l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 4-9. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 4-9. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9. l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 4-9. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 4-9. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9.

3.

Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9 until the VBNC reaches the peak within the tracked range.

4.

Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna at the local end.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-43

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning NOTE

When you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains the peak value.

Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When the VBNC reaches the peak value, tighten the antenna at the remote end. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When the VBNC at the local end and the VBNC at the remote end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends Step 6 Use the multimeter to test the VBNC voltage at both ends. Obtain the current RSL by referring to the relation curve between the VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends. NOTE

The curve diagram of the VBNC and RSL is delivered in the carton of the ODU.

The actual RSL must be the same as planned by the network planning department. NOTE

l If the VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide for handling the fault.

Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator should be off. If the ODU indicator blinks yellow, align the antennas. Step 8 Tighten all the screws of the antennas. NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas in the process of tightening the screws.

----End

4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas When you align dual-polarized antennas, align the main lobe of the antenna signals by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. You also need to adjust the feed booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specified requirements.

Prerequisite l

The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link must be complete.

l

The weather must be suitable for outdoor work. There should be no rain, snow or fog between stations.

l

The on-site conditions must meet the requirements for the antenna to operate at a high altitude and the personnel required to commission the antenna must be trained to work at high altitudes.

l

The ATPC function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

l

The AM function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

4-44

l

Adjustable wrench

l

Telescope, interphone, socket-head wrench Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

l

4 Site Commissioning

Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests), and north-stabilized indicator.

Procedure Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link. If...

Then...

The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT Adjust the antenna as a single-polarized antenna. For the detailed operations, see 4.5.2 Aligning the Single-Polarized Antennas . The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna

Proceed to the next step.

Step 2 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, power on the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and thus ensure that the antennas transmit horizontally polarized signals. Step 3 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.5.2 Aligning the Single-Polarized Antennas , and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna. Step 4 Measure the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end. 1.

Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized ODU.

2.

Calculate the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the curve diagram in the ODU box.

Step 5 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P2). 1.

Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU.

3.

Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram in the ODU box.

4.

Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2). If...

Then...

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should be less than 30 Proceed to the next step. dB. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should not be less than Perform Step 6. 30 dB. 5.

Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should not be less than 30 dB.

Step 6 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-45

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 7 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, power on the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and thus ensure that the antennas transmit vertically polarized signals. Step 8 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step 4. Step 9 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P4). 1.

Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU.

3.

Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram in the ODU box.

4.

Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4). If...

Then...

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should be less than 30 Proceed to the next step. dB. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than Perform Step 10. 30 dB. 5.

Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than 30 dB.

Step 10 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom. Step 11 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 are not less than 30 dB. NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you need not adjust the feed boom.

Step 12 Tighten all the screws of the antennas. NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas in the process of tightening the screws.

----End

Related Information In the actual situation, you can align the dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized signals.

4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas, you need to query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are normal. 4-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Prerequisite Aligning the antennas must be complete.

Procedure

STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

Step 1 Observe the Link indicator on the IF board.

1.

If the Link indicator on the IF board is on (green), it indicates that the radio link is normal.

2.

If the Link indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration of the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.

----End

4.7 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. Querying the radio links through the HOP management, you can check whether the DCN of radio links runs normally.

Prerequisite l

The basic data of NEs on the entire network must be configured.

l

Aligning the antennas must be complete.

l

The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-47

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure Step 1 Select an NE in Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from Function Tree. Step 2 In the IF/ODU Configuration tab, select and right-click the required IF board. Then, choose HOP Management from the shortcut menu.

l If the HOP manage window is displayed as Figure 4-12, then the DCN of radio links runs normally. Figure 4-12 HOP manage

l If the dialog box is displayed as The opposite NE does not exist, then check the data configuration. ----End

4-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5

5 System Commissioning Guide

System Commissioning Guide

About This Chapter This topic describes how to perform all the system commissioning items. 5.1 Configuring the Network-wide Service Data After the site commissioning is performed for each hop of radio links, the ECC communication between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using Web LCT, and the networkwide service data can be configured. 5.2 Testing the E1 Service By testing the E1 service, you can check whether the E1 service is available over radio links. 5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service By testing the Ethernet service, you can check whether the Ethernet service is available over radio links. The Ethernet service can be tested through the ETH-OAM function. Thus, no tester is required. 5.4 Testing the ATM Service By testing the ATM service, you can check whether the ATM service is available over radio links. The ATM service can be tested through the ATM OAM function. Thus, no tester is required. 5.5 Testing the AM Switching By testing the AM switching, you can check whether the AM switching is normal over radio links. 5.6 Testing the Protection Switching By testing the protection switching, you can check whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. 5.7 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized. 5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs). 5.9 Testing the 24-Hour BER Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

5 System Commissioning Guide

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing the 24-hour BER.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

5.1 Configuring the Network-wide Service Data After the site commissioning is performed for each hop of radio links, the ECC communication between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using Web LCT, and the networkwide service data can be configured. NOTE

This section only includes the basic configuration tasks related to NEs, TDM services, and clocks. For more configuration tasks, see the Configuration Guide.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the Web LCT can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable. 5.1.2 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE. 5.1.3 Changing the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering planning to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services. 5.1.4 Changing the NE Name To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE. 5.1.5 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask. 5.1.6 Configuring the Logical Board If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board. 5.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1 +1 protection group. 5.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link. 5.1.9 Configuring the ATPC Attributes To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board. 5.1.10 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server, you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur. 5.1.11 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink. 5.1.12 Configuring the Clock Sources

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock. 5.1.13 Configuring the Orderwire The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the Web LCT can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisite l

The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Select Transport NE Search tab. Step 2 In NE List, click NE Search. Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the search mode. Step 4 Optional: If Search Mode is set to Search NE, you need to set the network segment. 1.

Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.

2.

Optional: Click Add, and set Domain Type and Domain Address to add a network segment.

3.

Optional: Select an existing network segment, and click Modify to modify the network segment.

4.

Optional: Select an existing network segment, and click Delete to delete the network segment. NOTE

During initial configuration, Domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. After the gateway NE IP address of the searched NE is changed, you need to change the value of Domain. The default network segment cannot be modified and deleted.

Step 5 Click Search. Step 6 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 7 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully. Step 8 Click OK. A new NE is already added to the NE list.

Step 9 Click Cancel. ----End

Related References A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

5.1.2 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The NEs to be managed must be created in the NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login. TIP

You can select more than one NE at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

l The default User Name is lct. l The default Password of user lct is password. Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE. Step 3 Click NE Explorer. The NE Explorer is displayed. TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list. TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout diagram. l Click

to fold/unfold the legend.

----End

Related References A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE

5.1.3 Changing the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering planning to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT 5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 4 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. ----End

Related References A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_Changing NE IDs

5.1.4 Changing the NE Name To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in Name. NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any space or Chinese characters.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 3 Click Apply. ----End

5.1.5 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply. NOTE

When you configure multiple parameters, click Apply respectively.

5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

----End

Related References A.4 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

5.1.6 Configuring the Logical Board If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

All the boards must be installed correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards. Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required but still not be configured for certain physical boards. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then select Add XXX. XXX is the name of the board to be added. Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then select Delete. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the board.

----End

5.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1 +1 protection group.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.

l

The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection through the configuration of the IF 1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. 5-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Related References A.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

5.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Precautions l

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main radio link.

l

In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.

l

In the case of XPIC configuration, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the two radio links in different polarization directions separately.

l

In the case of N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links respectively.

l

The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, 1588 timeslot enabled status, modulation mode, or IF bandwidth is set inconsistently for both ends of a Integrated IP radio link.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link. Step 7 Click Apply. ----End

Related References A.6 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

5.1.9 Configuring the ATPC Attributes To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The corresponding IF board must be added on the Slot Layout.

l

For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board.

Precautions

5-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

l

5 System Commissioning Guide

The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the following configuration dialog boxes: Create an XPIC working group

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure the parameters of ATPC attributes.

Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

5.1.10 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server, you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone and time must be set correctly on the PC or server that is installed with the NMS software.

l

When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the synchronous mode. If...

Then...

You set Synchronous Mode to NULL

Set the relevant parameters, and then click Apply.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

If...

Then...

You set Synchronous Mode to NM

Set the relevant parameters, and then click Apply to perform step Step 5.

You set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP Set the related parameters, and then click Apply to perform steps Step 3.

NOTE

If you only need to synchronize the NE time and need not change the type of synchronization or parameters, select the synchronization option corresponding to the NE, right-click, and choose Synchronize with NM Time.

Step 3 Configure the upper-layer standard NTP server of the NE. 1.

Click the Standard NTP Server tab. In the Standard NTP Server tab page, click Add.

2.

After setting the parameters of the standard NTP server, click OK. NOTE

l If the NE is a GNE, set the external NTP server as the standard NTP server. l If the NE is a non-GNE, set the GNE as the standard NTP server.

Step 4 Optional: Configure standard NTP keys. 1.

Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.

2.

Click Add. The Add Key dialog box is displayed.

3.

After the related parameters are configured, click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and click Apply. ----End

Related References A.8 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization A.8 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

5.1.11 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink. 5-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters of a new SDH service. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Related References A.9 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

5.1.12 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority. Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab. Step 3 Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 4 Select the clock sources. TIP

By pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources. Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click clock source.

or

to adjust the priority of this

NOTE

The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal clock source is always of the lowest priority.

Step 8 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources.

Step 9 Click Apply. ----End

Related References A.10 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

5.1.13 Configuring the Orderwire The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. 5-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire. 1.

Click the Advanced tab.

2.

Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

3.

Click Apply.

----End

Related References A.11 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.12 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

5.2 Testing the E1 Service By testing the E1 service, you can check whether the E1 service is available over radio links.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest modulation mode. l The tested E1 service can be the Native E1 service or the CES E1 service.

5.2.1 Testing the E1 Service by Using a BER Tester If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test the E1 service. 5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS If no BER tester is available, you can test the E1 service by using the PRBS test system embedded in the equipment.

5.2.1 Testing the E1 Service by Using a BER Tester If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test the E1 service.

Prerequisite The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through the DDF.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester NOTE

For a test of CES services in CES/PSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 Kbps timeslot setting is necessary.

Procedure Step 1 On the DDF at the central site, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU. The BER tester indicates the AIS alarm. Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER tester DDF RX TX

RX

TX

. .. .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site. 5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 3 Test the bit errors for two minutes. There should be no bit errors. NOTE

For a test of CES services, it is necessary to configure 64 Kbps timeslots on a BER tester to align with the timeslots carrying CES services.

Step 4 Release the inloop set in Step 2. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to test all other E1 ports. ----End

5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS If no BER tester is available, you can test the E1 service by using the PRBS test system embedded in the equipment.

Prerequisite l

The NE equipment must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through the DDF.

l

The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Precautions

CAUTION l When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time. l CES services do not support a PRBS test.

Procedure Step 1 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 2 At the central site, on the NMS, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. Step 3 In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PRBS Test. Step 4 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters: l Direction: Cross l Duration: a value from 120 to 180 l Measured in Time: seconds

Step 5 Click Start to Test. The system displays a dialog box indicating The operation may interrupt the service, Are you sure to continue? Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 When the Progress column is 100%, click Query to check the test result. The curve diagram should be green. Step 8 Release the inloop set in Step 1. 5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 9 Repeat Step 1 through Step 8 to test all other E1 ports. ----End

5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service By testing the Ethernet service, you can check whether the Ethernet service is available over radio links. The Ethernet service can be tested through the ETH-OAM function. Thus, no tester is required.

Prerequisite Ethernet services must be configured. NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest modulation mode. l The tested Ethernet service can be the Native Ethernet service, the EoPDH service, or the Ethernet service carried by PWs.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Test Connection Diagram The following test procedure considers the Ethernet service from PORT2 on NE2 and PORT3 on NE3 to PORT1 on NE1 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-2.The three Ethernet ports are not on the EFP8 boards. Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing the Ethernet service NE 2

PORT 2

VLAN ID=100 PORT 1

NE 1

NE 3

PORT 3

Microwave network VLAN ID=200

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

The VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE2 to NE1 is 100, and the VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE3 to NE1 is 200. NOTE

If the Ethernet ports are on the EFP8 boards, you can still perform the following steps to test the Ethernet services by eliminating the need to set up the remote maintenance end point. In addition, the operations on the NMS are different. For details, see 8.1 Creating MDs, 8.2 Creating MAs, 8.3 Creating MPs, and 8.4 Performing an LB Test.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Choose New > New Maintenance Domain. The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.

3.

Configure the parameters of the new maintenance domains. l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3 l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE1, NE2, and NE3 NOTE

The maintenance domain names and the maintenance domain levels of the NEs must be the same.

4.

Click OK.

Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association. The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed.

3.

Configure the parameters of the new maintenance associations. l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3 l Relevant Service: services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3 NOTE

Click in Relevant Service, and select relevant services in the New Maintenance Association dialog box.

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

4.

5 System Commissioning Guide

Click OK.

Step 3 Configure the MEPs of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3.

Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point. The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.

4.

Configure the parameters of the new MEPs. l MP ID: 101 for NE1, 102 for NE2, and 103 for NE3 l Direction: Ingress for NE1, NE2, and NE3 l CC Status: activation for NE1, NE2, and NE3

5.

Click OK.

Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3.

Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click New. Then, the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.

5.

Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs. l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 and 103 for NE1, and 101 for NE2 and NE3 NOTE

Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE1 to the MP ID of NE2 and NE3, and set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE2 and NE3 to the MP ID of NE1.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

6.

Click OK.

Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3. 1.

Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of the NE1, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM.

2.

Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to Port 1, click OAM.

3.

Select Start LB. The LB Test window is displayed.

4.

Select MP ID, and set the parameters in Test Node. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1) l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE2) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (64 is a recommended value, and the parameter can also be set to 128, 256, 512, 1024, and 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different packet lengths.) NOTE

The maximum Packet Length is 1400.

l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)

5.

Click Start Test.

6.

Check Detection Result. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

5-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7.

5 System Commissioning Guide

Repeat Step 5.4 to Step 5.6 to test the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE3. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1) l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 103 (maintenance point ID of NE3) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended) The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

----End

5.4 Testing the ATM Service By testing the ATM service, you can check whether the ATM service is available over radio links. The ATM service can be tested through the ATM OAM function. Thus, no tester is required.

Prerequisite l

End-to-end ATM services must be configured.

l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Background Information When an LB test is performed on the ATM service, the segment and end attribute is set to specify the types of transmitted ATM OAM cells. l

When Segment End Attribute is set to Segment point, segment LB cells are transmitted.

l

When Segment End Attribute is set to Endpoint, end-to-end LB cells are transmitted.

Test Connection Diagram This example shows how to test the ATM service over a radio link hop. The method for testing the ATM services over multiple radio link hops is the same. Figure 5-3 shows the test connection diagram. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950. The services of the boards on the NE1 and NE2 are configured as follows: Attribute UNI

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

NE A

NE B

Service source

3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1)

3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1)

Bound port

3-MD1-1 (Port-1)

3-MD1-1 (Port-1)

3-MD1-2 (Port-2)

3-MD1-2 (Port-2)

VPI

1

101

VCI

51

501

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Attribute NNI

NE A

NE B

PW ID

1

1

Service source

-

-

Bound port

-

-

VPI

101

101

VCI

501

501

Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of the ATM service UNI VPI 1

NodeB

VCI 51

NNI VPI 101

NNI VCI 501

VPI 101

NE A

UNI

VCI 501

VPI 101

NE B

VCI 501

RNC

Procedure Step 1 Set the segment and end attributes of the ATM services on the NE A and NE B. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Segment and End Attribute tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.

3.

As for NE A and NE B, set Segment and End Attribute to Segment point.

4.

As for NE A and NE B, set Connection Direction to Backward.

5.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Set the identifier at the loopback point from NE A to NE B. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the LLID tab.

2.

Set Country Code, Network Code, and NE Code. Set the parameters of NE A as follows: l Set Country Code to 00 86. l Set Network Code to 00 16. l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00. Set the parameters of NE B as follows: l Set Country Code to 00 86.

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

l Set Network Code to 00 16. l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00. NOTE

If the default LLID is unique on a network, the default LLID can also be used.

3.

Click Apply.

Step 3 Test the ATM service from NE A to NE B. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.

3.

Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B.

4.

Click Test to start an LB test.

5.

In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded. If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test result.

Step 4 Test the ATM service from NE B to NE A. 1.

With reference of Step 1, set Connection Direction of NE A to Backward; set Connection Direction of NE B to Forward.

2.

Select NE B from the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.

3.

Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.

4.

Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B.

5.

Click Test to start an LB test.

6.

In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded. If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test result.

----End

5.5 Testing the AM Switching By testing the AM switching, you can check whether the AM switching is normal over radio links. 5.5.1 Testing the AM Switching by Using a BER Tester If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test the AM switching. 5.5.2 Testing the AM Switching Without a BER Tester If no BER tester is available, you can test the AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio links.

5.5.1 Testing the AM Switching by Using a BER Tester If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test the AM switching. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Prerequisite l

Aligning the antennas must be complete.

l

The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.

l

The E1 service must be configured.

l

The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester

Precautions The following test procedure considers the E1 service between NEs as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the BER tester to an E1 port on the local NE. NOTE

Test the E1 services with the highest priority, which are not discarded in the lowest-order modulation mode.

Step 2 On the remote NE, perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 3 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 4 Querying the AM working status on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Specified Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

5-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 5 Use the BER tester to test the bit errors. The test result should show that no bit error occurs. Step 6 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 7 Querying the AM working status on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value.

NOTE

In the case of unfavorable weather, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

Step 8 Check the BER test result. There should be no bit errors. Step 9 Release the inloop set in Step 2. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

----End

5.5.2 Testing the AM Switching Without a BER Tester If no BER tester is available, you can test the AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio links. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-29

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Prerequisite l

Aligning the antennas must be complete.

l

The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.

l

The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. 1.

Select the required IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.

3.

In Monitored Object Filter Condition, select All.

4.

Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute.

5.

In Count, select Other Errors. In Display Options, select Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Second.

6.

Click Query. In performance events, the value of FEC_BEF_COR_ER should be 0.

Step 3 Querying the AM working status on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Specified Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

Step 4 Reset the performance event register.

5-30

1.

Select the required IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3.

Click Reset. The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click OK.

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. In performance events, the value of FEC_BEF_COR_ER should be 0. Step 7 Querying the AM working status on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value.

NOTE

In the case of unfavorable weather, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

----End

5.6 Testing the Protection Switching By testing the protection switching, you can check whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. 5.6.1 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection works normally by checking the working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching. 5.6.2 Testing the N+1 Protection Switching You can verify whether the IF N+1 protection works normally by checking the working board of the IF N+1 protection group before and after the switching. 5.6.3 Testing the SNCP Switching You can verify whether the SNCP works normally by checking the working port of the SNCP protection group before and after the switching. 5.6.4 Testing the ERPS Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-31

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

You can verify whether the ERPS works normally by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after the switching. 5.6.5 Testing the MPLS APS Protection Switching By checking the change in the status of the MPLS tunnels before and after the MPLS APS switching, you can verify whether the MPLS APS protection function is normal. 5.6.6 Testing the Linear MSP Switching You can verify whether the linear MSP group works normally by checking the working port of the linear MSP group before and after the switching.

5.6.1 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection works normally by checking the working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite l

Aligning the antennas is complete.

l

The equipment is configured with the IF 1+1 protection.

l

The E1 service is configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester

Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-4 Configuration for testing the IF 1+1 switching NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l

Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3

l

Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5

l

Main ODU: ODU in slot 23

l

Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

NE A

NE B

As shown in Figure 5-4, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A and NE B that is configured with the 1+1 HSB protection as an example. 5-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Precautions NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board of Channel in Protection Group before the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 2 to Step 11.

No BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 6 to Step 10.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. Step 5 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A. 1.

Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

3.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse Switching to Enable.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

3.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and then click Query.

4.

In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board 3-ISU2.

Step 7 Set TX Status to mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-33

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 8 Check the availability of the service after the switching. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the service is restored after a transient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through E1 service is transmitted on the radio link. PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service. No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service to test Ethernet service is transmitted on the radio the availability of the Ethernet service. link. Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

3.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and then click Query.

4.

In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board 5-ISU2.

Step 10 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 11 Release the loopback set in Step 3. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 12 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 5. 5-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

1.

Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

3.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse Switching to Disable.

4.

Click Apply.

----End

5.6.2 Testing the N+1 Protection Switching You can verify whether the IF N+1 protection works normally by checking the working board of the IF N+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite l

Aligning the antennas must be complete.

l

The equipment must be configured with the N+1 protection.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester

Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing the N+1 protection NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l

Main IF boards: ISU2 in slot 3 and ISU2 in slot 5

l

Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 4

l

Main ODUs: ODU in slot 23 and ODU in slot 25

l

Standby ODU: ODU in slot 24

NE A

NE B

As shown in Figure 5-5, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A and NE B that is configured with the N+1 (N=2) configuration as an example.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-35

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Precautions NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot Mapping Relation before the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 2 to Step 10.

No BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the N+1 Protection tab.

3.

Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.

4.

In Slot Mapping Relation, Switching Status of the working units 3-ISU2-1 and 5ISU2-1 and the protection unit 4-ISU2-1 should be Normal.

NOTE

If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the N+1 protection testing.

Step 6 Set TX Status to mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

5-36

1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.

4.

Click Apply. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 7 Check the availability of the service after the switching. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the service is restored after a transient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through E1 service is transmitted on the radio link. PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service. No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service to test Ethernet service is transmitted on the radio the availability of the Ethernet service. link. Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the N+1 Protection tab.

3.

Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.

4.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of the working unit 3-ISU2-1 for the service that is configured with the N+1 protection should be SF.

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

----End

5.6.3 Testing the SNCP Switching You can verify whether the SNCP works normally by checking the working port of the SNCP protection group before and after the switching. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-37

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Prerequisite l

Aligning the antennas must be complete.

l

The equipment must be configured with the SNCP.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester

Test Connection Diagram As shown in Figure 5-6, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A and NE C that is configured with the SNCP as an example. Figure 5-6 shows a network composed of radio links, and the test procedures are similar in the case of a network composed of optical fiber links. Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing the SNCP switching NE A and NE C are configured as follows: l

West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3

l

East IF board: ISU2 in slot 4

l

West ODU: ODU in slot 23

l

East ODU: ODU in slot 24 NE A

Working SNC

Protecting SNC

NE D NE B

NE C

5-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Precautions NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Current Channel in Working CorossConnections before the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 2 to Step 10.

No BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE C, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and then choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

2.

In Working Coross-Connections, select an SNCP service that is already created, then click Function, and finally select Query Switching Status.

3.

The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working CorossConnections and Protection Coross-Connections. In Current Status, Normal should be displayed. In Current Channel, Working Path should be displayed.

Step 6 Set TX Status to mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-39

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 7 Check the availability of the service after the switching. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the service is restored after a transient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through E1 service is transmitted on the radio link. PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service. Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and then choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Function, and then select Query Switching Status.

3.

The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working CorossConnections and Protection Coross-Connections. In Current Status, the service switching mode is displayed. In Current Channel, Protection Path should be displayed.

Step 9 Set TX Status to unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.

5-40

1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 6.

Click OK.

----End

5.6.4 Testing the ERPS You can verify whether the ERPS works normally by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite l

The equipment must be configured with the ERPS.

l

The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of the ERPS must be properly connected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Test Connection Diagram As shown in Figure 5-7, the following procedures consider the Ethernet service between NE A and NE D that is configured with the ERPS as an example, the owner node is NE D. Figure 5-7 Configuration for testing the ERPS NE A, NE B, NE C and NE D are configured as follows: l

Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3

l

Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5

l

Main ODU: ODU in slot 23

l

Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-41

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

West

East

NE B Protection channel West

East

NE A

NE D

East West

Working channel West

NE C East

Procedure Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and then click Query.

3.

The value of Status of State Machine should be Idle.

Step 2 See 5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service to test the availability of the Ethernet service. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Step 3 Set TX Status to mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 5-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and then click Query.

3.

The value of Status of State Machine should be Protection.

Step 5 See 5.3 Testing the Ethernet Service to test the availability of the Ethernet service. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Step 6 Set TX Status to unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4.

Click Apply.

----End

5.6.5 Testing the MPLS APS Protection Switching By checking the change in the status of the MPLS tunnels before and after the MPLS APS switching, you can verify whether the MPLS APS protection function is normal.

Prerequisite l

The MPLS tunnel protection group must be created properly.

l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Background Information 1:1 protection In normal situations, services are transmitted in the working tunnel. That is, services are transmitted and received in a different tunnel respectively. When the working tunnel is faulty, the equipment at the transmit end transmits services through the protection tunnel, and the equipment at the receive end receive services through the protection tunnel after a negotiation through the APS protocol. Thus, service switching is realized.

Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-8 shows the test connection diagram for the MPLS APS protection. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-43

5 System Commissioning Guide

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Figure 5-8 Connection diagram for testing the MPLS APS protection Working Tunnel NE A

NE B

Protection Tunnel

Procedure Step 1 Query the switching status of the current MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection group on NE A and NE B. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Tunnel APS Management tab, right-click the tested protection group, and then choose Query Switching Status from the short-cut menu, to check the MPLS protection group configured on the NE.

3.

Choose the protection group for switching, and check its switching status. In normal situations, the switching status should be Normal.

Step 2 Switch the services to the protection tunnel manually and forcedly.

5-44

1.

In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

3.

5 System Commissioning Guide

Right-click the tested protection group, and then choose Forced Switching from the shortcut menu. NOTE

l Forced switching: With the highest priority, the operation is performed no matter whether the current status of the protection tunnel is normal. l Manual switching: The operation is performed only when the status of the protection tunnel is normal.

Step 3 Query the switching status of the MPLS 1:1 protection groups on NE A and NE B after switching. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.

3.

Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Query Switching Status from the short-cut menu, to check Switching Status of the tunnel protection group. In normal situations, the switching status should be Forced Switching.

4.

Query Active Tunnel of the tunnel protection group. In normal situation, Working should be Standby, and Protection should be Active.

NOTE

l If Forced Switching is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group should be Forced Switching. l If Manual Switching to Protection is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group should be Manual (Working to Protection) Switching.

Step 4 Restore the services on NE A and NE B to the working tunnel. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.

3.

Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Clear from the short-cut menu.

4.

Click Query. Services is restored to the working tunnel.

----End

5.6.6 Testing the Linear MSP Switching You can verify whether the linear MSP group works normally by checking the working port of the linear MSP group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite l

The equipment must be configured with the linear MSP.

l

The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-45

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester

Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-9 shows the linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN equipment through the connection of optical fibers. The following procedures consider the E1 service from NE A to NE B as an example. Figure 5-9 Configuration for testing the Ethernet service Working channel

NE A

NE B

Protection channel

Precautions NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot Mapping Relation before the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If...

Then...

A BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 2 to Step 10.

No BER tester is available on site

Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the corresponding E1 port by using the NMS. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. 5-46

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. If bit errors occur, see the Maintenance Guide for handling the bit errors. Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

2.

In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.

3.

Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status. In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Idle.

NOTE

In the case of the working and protection units of the service that is configured with the linear MSP, the values of West Switching Status should be Idle. If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and proceed with the linear MSP switching testing.

Step 6 Shut down the laser for the working unit on NE A. 1.

Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A.

2.

Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

3.

Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

4.

Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to Close.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 7 Check the availability of the service after the switching. If...

Then...

The BER tester is available on site

Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the service is restored after a transient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing the E1 Service Through E1 service is transmitted on the optical fiber PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service. link. Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

2.

In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.

3.

Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status. In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Switch upon signal failure.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-47

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

NOTE

In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive. l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the service is restored. If Revertive Mode is set to Revertive for the linear MSP, the change in values of West Switching Status and Protected Unit can be queried after the WTR time expires. l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the service is restored. If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP, stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore the value of West Switching Status to Idle.

Step 9 Turn on the laser for the working unit on NE A. 1.

Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A.

2.

Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

3.

Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

4.

Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to Open.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

----End

5.7 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized.

Prerequisite The clock configuration must be complete. The link that transmits clocks must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT 5-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. NOTE

l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network, this clock should be in freerun mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in tracing mode. l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network, the clocks of all the NEs should be in tracing mode.

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network. ----End

5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).

Prerequisite l

The weather must be fine.

l

The antennas must be aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the radio link and the crosspolarization discrimination (XPD) must meet the requirements.

Background Information The principle of the FM test is as follows: l

Test the corresponding relations between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites.

l

Calculate the RSL corresponding to the demodulation threshold of the MSE, that is, the receiver sensitivity of the site.

l

The current RSL minus the receiver sensitivity is the FM.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Precautions 1.

The FM test can be supported by the IFU2 board and IFX2 board.

2.

When the FM is tested, all the services carried on the radio link maybe interrupted.

3.

For a radio link with 1+1 protection, it is recommended that you lock the protection path before testing the main radio link and that you switch the signal to the standby path forcedly before you test the standby radio link. The main and standby radio paths are tested synchronously. Thus, the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at the same time.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-49

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

4.

For an XPIC radio link, the paths in polarization direction V and polarization direction H are tested synchronously. Thus, the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at the same time.

Procedure Step 1 Disable the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites. 1.

Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface.

2.

Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

3.

Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Disable the AM function on the radio link between two sites. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Enable Status to Disabled.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 3 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Fade Margin. Step 4 Click the Fade Margin tab. Step 5 Select the IF board corresponding to the radio link that needs to be tested.

The Result dialog box displays the query result.

Step 6 In Direction, select Remote To Local.

Step 7 Click Start. The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful.

5-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

Step 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7. In Direction, select Local To Remote. The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful. Step 9 Restore the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites. 1.

Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface.

2.

Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

3.

Set ATPC Enable Status to Enabled.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 10 Restore the AM function and E1 priority on the radio link between two sites. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-51

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide

3.

Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Enable Status to Enabled.

4.

Set Enable E1 priority to Enabled, and Full E1 Capacity to the initial value.

5.

Click Apply.

----End

5.9 Testing the 24-Hour BER You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing the 24-hour BER.

Prerequisite Aligning the antennas must be complete. The E1 service must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Web LCT

l

BER tester

l

E1 jumper

l

If the 24-hour BER cannot be tested for each hop of link because of restrictions of the actual situation, choose the E1 service of the first node and the last node on each link to perform the test. Through this method, you can ensure that the test path cover all the radio links.

l

The following test procedure considers the E1 service between NEs as an example.

Precautions

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest modulation mode. l The tested E1 service can be the Native E1 service or the CES E1 service. l For a test of CES services in CES/PSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 Kbps timeslot setting is necessary. l For a test of CES E1 services, disable the automatic loopback release function on the PDH interface board. 1. Select NEs in the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function in the Function Tree. 2. Click the Automatic Disabling of NE Function tab. 3. For SDH Optical/Electrical Interface, set Auto Disabling to Disabled. 4. Click Apply.

Procedure Step 1 At the central site, extract several typical E1 services on the equipment and then connect them to the DDF in a serial manner. After that, input these services into the BER tester.

5-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

5 System Commissioning Guide DDF

RX TX

RX

TX

. .. .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 On the equipment at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

Step 3 Perform the 24-hour BER test by using the BER tester. Step 4 Record the test result, which should meet the design requirements. Step 5 Release the loopback and serial connection. 1.

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3.

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4.

In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure l

If the first 24-hour BER test does not meet the specified requirement, find out the cause and rectify the fault. Perform another 24-hour BER test until the test is passed.

l

If the BER exceeds the nominal value in the test for a serial connection, locate the fault by using the dichotomizing search or other methods until each channel passes the 24-hour BER test independently.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-53

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

6

6 Introduction to the Hand-Held Tool

Introduction to the Hand-Held Tool

About This Chapter To improve commissioning efficiency, Huawei has developed the hand-held tool dedicated to the site commissioning of the OptiX RTN equipment. 6.1 Functions and Features The hand-held tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site commissioning of microwave equipment. 6.2 Operation Interface The hand-held tool provides a user-friendly interface.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

6 Introduction to the Hand-Held Tool

6.1 Functions and Features The hand-held tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site commissioning of microwave equipment. The hand-held tool provides the following functions: l

Supports switch-on by pressing and holding the power button.

l

Supports automatic login to the NE upon switch-on, and supports serial port login mode from MML to NMS.

l

Automatically adds logical boards for in-position physical boards.

l

Automatically changes the LCT access enabling status to Enable.

l

Displays all in-service physical board information in the standby window.

l

Supports settings of IF information through the F1 key, settings of NE attributes through function key F2, and query of configurations through function key F3.

l

Supports settings and query of IF information, including transmit frequency, transmit power, T/R spacing, IF channel bandwidth, modulation mode, and 1+1 protection scheme.

l

Supports settings and query of NE attributes, including NE name, NE ID, extended ID, extended ECC, IP address, and subnet mask.

l

Supports settings and query of the DCN of an NE.

l

Supports regular query of the receive power of an ODU.

l

Supports query of the basic information, frequency range, power range, and serial number of an ODU.

l

Supports query of all current alarms on the NE.

l

Supports query of the NE version and terminal version.

l

Supports automatic backup to the flash memory for data protection after the NE databases are updated.

l

Supports a real-time check on the physical connections between the hand-held tool and the NE when the user interface is in standby state. Supports automatic re-login in the case of disconnection.

6.2 Operation Interface The hand-held tool provides a user-friendly interface. The hand-held tool is available in two types: type I and type IV. The two types are the same in function, but are different in exterior and key arrangement. The following figure shows the exterior and key arrangement of the two types of hand-held tool.

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

6 Introduction to the Hand-Held Tool

Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I hand-held tool

Screen

Charge indicator Power key

Communication indicator

Digit keys

Decimal points Up and down keys

Backspace

Battery area

Function keys Communication port Back Reset port cover lock

The keys include digit keys, function keys, power key, and confirmation key. The window mainly displays configuration information about the NE and modification.

Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type II hand-held tool

Screen

Up and down keys Reset port Digit keys

Backspace

1 4 7 C

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

Charge indicator

F1 F2 F3

Communication port Function keys

Power key Front

Back

Type I and type II are almost the same. The main difference is with regard to the key arrangement.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Configuration Example of Service Data

About This Chapter This topic uses an example of configuring service data of one hop of TDM radio equipment to describe how to configure service data. 7.1 Networking Diagram This topic describes the networking information about the NEs. 7.2 Board Configurations Before performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the board configurations of each NE. 7.3 Service Planning The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring the NE data. 7.4 Configuration Process This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

7.1 Networking Diagram This topic describes the networking information about the NEs. As shown in Figure 7-1, there is a TDM radio link between NE A and NE B that are constructed by the OptiX RTN 950, you need to configure 1+1 HSB for the radio link between NE A and NE B. Figure 7-1 Networking diagram

101 14930M 14510M 8E1，7M，16QAM 1+1 HSB H-polarzation

Tx high

Tx low

NE B

NE A Link ID Tx high station Tx Freq. Tx low station Tx Freq. Radio work mode RF configuarion Polarization

7.2 Board Configurations Before performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the board configurations of each NE. The board configurations of NE A are the same as the board configurations of NE B, as shown in Figure 7-2.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram SLOT 10 (PIU) SLOT 11 SLOT (FAN) 9 (PIU)

CST

SLOT 7

IF1

SLOT 5

SLOT 6

IF1

SLOT 3

SLOT 4

SLOT 1

CST

SLOT 7

SP3D

SLOT 2

NOTE

The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 20+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not shown in the board layout diagram.

7.3 Service Planning The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring the NE data.

NE attributes Parameter

NE A

NE B

Equipment type

OptiX RTN 950

OptiX RTN 950

NE ID

101

102

extended ID

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

NE IP address

129.9.0.101

129.9.0.102

Radio Link Information Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links Parameter

Link 1

Tx high site

NE A

Tx low site

NE B

Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz)

14930

Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz)

14510

T/R Spacing (MHz)

420

Microwave working mode

4) 8E1, 7MHz, 16QAM

Link protection mode

1+1 HSB

Polarization directiona

H (horizontal polarization)

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter

Link 1

Transmit power (dBm)

5 (NE A) 5 (NE B)

Receive power (dBm)

-42 (NE A) -42 (NE B)

ATPC enabling

Disabled

NOTE a: The planning information that is not associated with the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization direction) is not provided in this example.

Information About IF Boards Based on the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1 protection, you can obtain the information of IF boards as shown in Table 7-2. Table 7-2 Information about IF boards Parameter

Link 1

Main IF board

3-IF1

Standby IF board

5-IF1

RF configuration mode

1+1 HSB

Revertive mode

Revertive (default value)

Wait to Restore Time

600 seconds (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching

Disabled

Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram

Links-1: NE A-NE B Station NE A

NE B 3-IF1

Timeslot VC4-1

VC12: 1-8

3-IF1 VC12: 1-8

2-SP3D:1-8

2-SP3D:1-8 Add/Drop Foward

7-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Figure 7-3shows the service timeslots between NEs. E1 services between NE A and NE B: Ports 1-8 on the SP3D board in slot 2 add/drop services.

Clock and Orderwire Information Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information Parameter

NE A

NE B

Clock source

First clock source

Internal clock source

3-IF1-1

Second clock source

-

5-IF1-1

Third clock source

-

Internal clock source

Orderwire phone number

101

102

Call waiting time

5 seconds

5 seconds

Orderwire port

3-IF1-1

3-IF1-1

5-IF1-1

5-IF1-1

E1

E1

Orderw ire

Occupied overhead type

7.4 Configuration Process This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Precautions If operations including changing the ID of an NE, modifying the parameters of NE communication, and configuring logical boards are already performed, start site commissioning from Step 6.

Procedure Step 1 See Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs. The parameters are set as follows.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Parameter

Value

Network Segment

129.9.255.255

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data NOTE

In this example, the following assumptions are made: the IP address of the gateway NE is never changed and the specific IP address is unknown. Therefore, the network segment 129.9.255.255 is used as the search domain to search for NEs. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP address of the gateway NE as the search domain.

In normal cases, NE A and NE B are created in NE List. Step 2 See Logging in to an NE and log in to the NEs. Parameter

Value

User Name

lct

Password

password

Step 3 See Changing the ID of an NE and change NE IDs. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter

Value NE A

NE B

ID

101

102

Extended ID

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

Step 4 See Configuring Logical Boards and configure logical boards. Configure logical boards based on their mapping relationships with the physical boards. Step 5 See Synchronizing NE Time and synchronize the NE time. Step 6 See Creating IF 1+1 Protection and create IF 1+1 protection. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter

Value NE A

NE B

Working Mode

HSB

HSB

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

WTR Time(s)

600

600

Enable Reverse Switching

Disabled

Disabled

Working Board

3-IF1A-1

3-IF1A-1

Protection Boar

5-IF1-1

5-IF1-1

Step 7 See Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU information. 7-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter

Value (NE A)

Value (NE B)

3-IF1 & 23-ODU

3-IF1 & 23-ODU

Work Mode

4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM

4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM

Link ID

101

101

TX Frequency(MHz)

14930

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

5

5

TX Status

unmute

unmute

Receive Power (dBm)

-42

-42

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

Step 8 See Creating Cross-Connections for Point-to-Point Services and create the crossconnections. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter

Value NE A

NE B

Level

VC-12

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source

3-IF1-1

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-8

1-8

Sink

2-SP3D

2-SP3D

Sink VC4

-

-

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-8

1-8

Step 9 See Configuring a Clock Source and configure clock sources. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter

Value

Clock Source

NE A

NE B

Internal Clock Source

3-IF1-1

-

5-IF1-1

-

Internal Clock Source

Step 10 See Configuring the Orderwire Phone and configure the orderwire phone. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter

Value NE A

NE B

Call Waiting Time(s)

9

9

Phone 1

101

102

Orderwire Port

3-IF1-1

3-IF1-1

5-IF1-1

5-IF1-1

E1

E1

Occupied Overhead Byte

----End

7-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

8

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

About This Chapter This section describes the ETH-OAM operations that are commonly performed on the EoPDH plane. 8.1 Creating MDs A maintenance domain (MD) defines the scope and level of the 802.1ag OAM. The MDs of different levels and scopes can provide differentiated OAM services to users. 8.2 Creating MAs A maintenance domain (MD) can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MA). By creating MAs, operators can associate specific Ethernet services with the MAs for easy Ethernet OAM operation. 8.3 Creating MPs MPs refer to function entities of IEEE 802.1ag OAM, including MEPs and MIPs. The functions of the IEEE 802.1ag OAM can be used only after MPs are created. 8.4 Performing an LB Test During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source MEP and any MP in the same maintenance association (MA).

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

8.1 Creating MDs A maintenance domain (MD) defines the scope and level of the 802.1ag OAM. The MDs of different levels and scopes can provide differentiated OAM services to users.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The EFP8 board must be added in the Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the right pane, click OAM Configuration. The OAM Configuration dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

In this GUI interface, you can maintain or delete OAM MDs.

Step 3 Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list. The Create MD dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the parameters of the new MD.

8-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Related References A.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs

8.2 Creating MAs A maintenance domain (MD) can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MA). By creating MAs, operators can associate specific Ethernet services with the MAs for easy Ethernet OAM operation.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The EFP8 board must be added in the Slot Layout.

l

The MD must be created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the right pane, click OAM Configuration. The OAM Configuration dialog box is displayed. NOTE

In this GUI interface, you can maintain or delete OAM MAs.

Step 3 Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.

1.

The Create MA dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the parameters of the new MA.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Related References A.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs

8.3 Creating MPs MPs refer to function entities of IEEE 802.1ag OAM, including MEPs and MIPs. The functions of the IEEE 802.1ag OAM can be used only after MPs are created.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The EFP8 board must be added in the Slot Layout.

l

The Ethernet services must be created and activated.

l

The MD and MA must be created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Precautions In an OAM test, all MPs that are involved in the operation of the same service flow must be in the same MD. In an existing MD involved in the same service flow, creating an MP of the same level or a higher level may damage the existing MD. As a result, the OAM test fails.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create MP dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters of the new MP.

Step 4 Optional: Click Advanced. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the corresponding parameters and click OK. 8-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

NOTE

If an MEP is created, you can choose whether to perform the following configurations: l Activate the CC and set the sending period of the CC test. l Set the timeout time for the LB or LT test.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Related References A.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs

8.4 Performing an LB Test During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source MEP and any MP in the same maintenance association (MA).

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The EFP8 board must be added in the Slot Layout.

l

The source and sink MEPs in the same MD must be created.

l

In the case of a standard MP, you must activate CC before an LB test.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Background Information l

Only an MEP can initiate an LB test.

l

During the LB test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LBM frames and starts the timer. If the sink MP receives the LBM frames, it sends the LBR frames back to the source MEP. This indicates that the loopback is successful. If the source MEP timer times out, it indicates that the loopback fails.

l

Performing an LB test does not affect the services.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

8 ETH-OAM Operations on the EoPDH Plane

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

Step 2 Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB. The LB Test dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters involved in the LB test. NOTE

l In the case of standard MPs, when an MIP functions as the receive end in the LB test, you need to select Test based on the MAC Address and set LB Sink MP MAC Address. l Before the LB test, you can set LB Timeout(ms) according to the actual requirements.

Step 4 Click Start LB. Then, the test result is displayed. ----End

Related References A.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB

8-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

A

Parameters Description

This topic describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE. A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. A.4 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting. A.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group. A.6 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU. A.7 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes. A.8 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. A.9 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections. A.10 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source. A.11 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features. A.12 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features. A.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs). A.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Parameters Description

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs). A.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP). A.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.

A-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path In NE List, click NE Search.

Parameters for Searching NEs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Domain

129.9.255.255

10.255.255.255

This parameter specifies the network segment to be searched.

10.255.255.255 NE Name

-

-

This parameter displays the name of the found NE.

NE ID

-

-

This parameter displays the ID of the found NE.

Gateway

GNE

-

This parameter displays whether the found NE is a GNE or non-GNE.

Non-GNE Gateway IP Address

-

-

This parameter displays the gateway IP address of the found NE.

Port No.

1400

1400

This parameter displays the communication port number of the found NE.

Gateway Type

IP Gateway

IP Gateway

This parameter displays the gateway type of the found NE.

Parameters for Managing a Network Segment Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Domain Type

GNE IP Domain

GNE IP Domain

l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the GNE, select GNE IP Domain.

GNE IP Address

l To search for the GNE only, select GNE IP Address.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Domain Address

-

-

l When Domain Type is GNE IP Domain, enter the IP network segment where the GNE is located, for example, 129.9.255.255. l When Domain Type is GNE IP Address, enter the IP address of the GNE, for example, 129.9.x.x.

Related Tasks 5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE.

Navigation Path In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

User Name

-

lct

This parameter specifies the name of the user. This parameter can take the default value in the case of initial login.

Password

-

-

The default password of user lct is password.

Use the same user name and password to login

Selected

Deselected

When this parameter is selected, enter User Name and Password to log in to all the selected NEs.

Use the user name and password that was used last time

Selected

Deselected

When this parameter is selected, enter User Name and Password that were used for the latest login to log in to the NE.

Deselected

Deselected

Related Tasks 5.1.2 Logging In to an NE A-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Modify NE ID.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

New ID

-

-

l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

1 to 254

New Extended ID

9

If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.

Related Tasks 4.2.4 Changing the NE ID 5.1.3 Changing the NE ID

A.4 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP

-

Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID.

Gateway IP

-

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

-

255.255.0.0

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1.

Extended ID

1 to 254

9

l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

NSAP Address

A-6

-

-

This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Connection Mode

Common + Security SSL

Common + Security SSL

l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE.

Common Security SSL

l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS, Connection Mode can be set to Common. l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking, Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level, Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.

Related Tasks 4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters 5.1.5 Setting NE Communication Parameters

A.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

3.

Click New.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Mode

HSB

HSB

l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

FD

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.

SD

l In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Revertive Mode

Revertive

Revertive

Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

A-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Enabled

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group.

Protection Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks 4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group 5.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-9

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

A.6 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Parameters for Configuring the IF Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Work Mode

1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.

2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK

l This parameter is set according to the planning information. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same. NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.

6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM

A-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Link ID

1 to 4094

1

l This parameter indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.

Received Link ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-11

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Channel Bandwidth

7M

-

IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.

14M 28M 40M

NOTE

56M

l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 7M, 14M, and 40M. l The ISX2 board does not support the values 7M and 14M.

AM Mode

-

-

This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 950.

AM Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l When this parameter is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.

Enabled

l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually Specified Modulation Mode

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

A-12

QPSK

l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

16QAM

l This parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

16QAM

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l This parameter specifies the highestgain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity

-

-

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. NOTE The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-13

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Guarantee E1 Capacity

-

-

l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Guarantee E1 Capacity Range

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode.

Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s)

-

-

Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board.

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function.

Enabled

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

A-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Full E1 Capacity

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity Range

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RF Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Frequency (MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-15

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Range of TX Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU.

Actual TX Frequency(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU.

Actual RX Frequency(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.

Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)

A-16

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the Power Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Power(dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

Range of TX Power(dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power (dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-17

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Actual RX Power (dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU.

TX Status

Unmute

Unmute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU.

Mute

l When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to unmute. Actual TX Status

A-18

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Equipment Information Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Frequency(GHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.

Equip Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.

Station Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN

-

-

This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.

Transmission Power Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.

Related Tasks 4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link 5.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

A.7 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Path l

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l

Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-19

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled.

Enabled

l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-

-45.0

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-

-70.0

A-20

l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled.

Disabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm). ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm)

-

-

ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.

A.8 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree.

2.

Set the synchronous mode.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the NE.

NE ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-21

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronous Mode

Standard NTP

Null

l If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server.

NM Null

l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP. Standard NTP Authentication

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.

Disabled

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Standard NTP Server Flag

NE ID

NE ID

l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP.

NE IP

l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP.

A-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Standard NTP Server

-

-

l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server Key

0 to 1024

l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0".

0

l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key). Standard NTP Version

2

2

Set this parameter according to the settings for the standard NTP protocol version used at the peer end.

No

This parameter specifies whether to select a server preferentially when multiple NTP servers are available.

3

Used First

Yes No

Parameters of the access control rights Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ACL No.

1 to 250

1

This parameter specifies the number of the ACL.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-23

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Flag

NE ID

NE ID

l When ECC is used to communicate with the standard NTP server, set the parameter to NE ID.

NE IP

l When the IP protocol is used to communicate with the standard NTP server, set the parameter to NE IP. NE

-

-

This parameter specifies the ID or IP address of an NE.

Whether to Receive Data Packet

Yes

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to receive packets from an NE.

Right Level

query

query

The equipment provides four levels of access control. When an NTP access request is received on the local equipment, the request is matched with the levels from the minimum access limit to the maximum access limit, and the first matched level prevails. The matching order is as follows:

No

synchronize server peer

l Peer (minimum access limit): The time request and the control query can be carried out for the NTP service of the local equipment. The local clock can also be synchronized with the remote server. l Server: The time request and the control query can be carried out for the NTP service of the local equipment, but the local clock is not synchronized to the remote server. l Synchronization: The time query is allowed for only the NTP service of the local equipment. l Query (maximum access limit): The control query can be carried out only for the NTP service of the local equipment.

Parameters of the NTP key management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Encryption

MD5

MD5

This parameter specifies the MD5 key algorithm.

Key

1 to 1024

1

This parameter specifies the number of the key.

A-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Password

-

-

This parameter specifies the password of the key.

Trusted

Yes

No

If you set this parameter to No, the key is verified but cannot be trusted during the clock synchronization. Therefore, the clock of the NE cannot be synchronized.

No

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronization Starting Time

-

-

l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Selected

DST

Deselected

Deselected

l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time. l This parameter is set according to the actual situation.

Synchronization Period (days)

1 to 300

1

l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Related Tasks 5.1.10 Synchronizing the NE Time 5.1.10 Synchronizing the NE Time Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-25

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

A.9 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.

Navigation Path l

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree.

l

Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.

l

Click New.

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

VC12

VC12

l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created.

VC3

l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12.

VC4

l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Unidirectional

l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.

Source Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port of the service source.

A-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source VC4

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

-

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Sink

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.

Sink Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port of the service sink.

Sink VC4

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

-

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Related Tasks 5.1.11 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-27

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

A.10 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.

2.

Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source

-

-

l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 7. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 8. l The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes.

External Clock Source Mode

2Mbit/s

2Mbit/s

2MHz

l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l This parameter is set according to the external clock signal. In normal cases, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.

A-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronous Status Byte

SA4 to SA8

SA4

l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. In normal cases, the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM.

Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 is the highest)

-

-

Displays the priority sequence of clock sources. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority.

Related Tasks 5.1.12 Configuring the Clock Sources

A.11 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the General tab.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-29

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Call Waiting Time (s)

1 to 9

9

l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. l The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode

Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency

Conference Call

-

Dual-Tone Frequency

This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone.

888

l This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950 receives the call, the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site.

A-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Phone 1

100 to 99999999

101

l This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. l The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number. l The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs. l The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.

Available Orderwire Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone.

Selected Orderwire Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.

Related Tasks 4.2.11 Configuring the Orderwire 5.1.13 Configuring the Orderwire

A.12 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Advanced tab.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-31

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Orderwire Occupied Bytes

E1

E1

l This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals.

E2

l Regardless the parameter value, the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

Related Tasks 4.2.11 Configuring the Orderwire 5.1.13 Configuring the Orderwire

A.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.

3.

Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maintenance Domain Name

For example: MD1

-

Specifies the name of the MD.

A-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maintenance Domain Level

Consumer High(7)

Operator Low(0)

Specifies the level of the MD. The greater the value, the higher the level.

Consumer Middle(6) Consumer Low(5) Provider High(4) Provider Low(3) Operator High(2) Operator Middle(1) Operator Low(0)

Related Tasks 8.1 Creating MDs

A.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.

3.

Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-2 Parameters on the main interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maintenance Domain Name

For example: MD1

-

Displays the MD in which an MA is to be created.

Maintenance Association Name

For example: MA1

-

This parameter specifies the name of the MA, which is a service-related domain. By creating MAs, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a particular service instance.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-33

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Related Tasks 8.2 Creating MAs

A.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-3 Parameters on the main interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maintenance Domain Name

-

NULL

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of the MP. NOTE An MD is not required for a common MP. For the creation of a common MP, select NULL.

Maintenance Association Name

-

NULL

Specifies the maintenance association (MA) of the MP. NOTE An MA is not required for a common MP. For the creation of a common MP, select NULL.

Node

-

-

Specifies the port where you want to create an MP.

VLAN ID

-

-

l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which the service of the MP belongs. The information is contained in the OAM data packet. The MPs with the same VLAN ID in an MD can communicate with each other. l This parameter can be null in the case of PORT services, but need to be set in the case of PORT+VLAN services.

A-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MP ID

Standard MP: 00-00-0000 to FFFF-1FFF

00-00-0000

Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest to the lowest, the first byte indicates the network number, the second byte indicates the number of the node in the local network, and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID of the MP on the network node. The MP ID must be unique in the entire network.

MEP

Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE 802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance association end point (MEP) or a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).

Ingress

l Specifies the direction of the MEP.

Common MP: 00-00-0000 to FFFF-FF00 Type

MEP MIP

Direction

Ingress Egress

l Set this parameter to Ingress if the OAM data initiated by the MEP travels through the Ethernet switching unit on the local NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to Egress.

Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-4 Parameters for advanced attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

Consumer High(7)

Provider High(4)

Specifies the level of a common MP. The greater the value, the higher the level.

Consumer Middle (6)

NOTE This parameter is valid only for a common MP (NULL).

Consumer Low(5) Provider High(4) Provider Low(3) Operator High(2) Operator Middle(1) Operator Low(0) CC Status

Active

Inactive

Specifies whether to enable the connectivity check (CC) function at an MP.

5000

l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB test.

Inactive LB Timeout(ms)

3000 to 60000, in step of 100

l This parameter can be set only for an MEP.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-35

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LT Timeout(ms)

3000 to 60000, in step of 100

5000

l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT test. l This parameter can be set only for an MEP.

CCM Sending Period(ms)

Standard MP:

Standard MP

1000

1000

10000

Common MP:

6000

5000

600000 Common MP:

Specifies the interval for sending the CCM packet at the MP where the CC test is performed. l If this parameter takes a very small value, service bandwidth decreases significantly. l If this parameter takes a very great value, the CC test will become less capable in detecting service interruptions. The default value is recommended.

1000 to 60000, in step of 100

l This parameter can be set only for an MEP.

Related Tasks 8.3 Creating MPs

A.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-5 Parameters on the main interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LB Source MP ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the source maintenance point in the LB test.

A-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LB Sink MP ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the sink maintenance point in the LB test.

Test Result

-

-

Indicates the result of one LB test.

Test based on the MAC Address

Selected

Not selected

Select this parameter for an LB test based on MAC addresses.

Not selected

NOTE This parameter is valid only for a standard MP.

LB Sink MP MAC Address

-

-

Specifies the MAC address of the sink maintenance point in the LB test. This parameter is valid only in the case of Test based on the MAC Address.

Related Tasks 8.4 Performing an LB Test

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-37

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

B

Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. B.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. B.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. B.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. B.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. B.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. B.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

B.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1U

The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

B.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A ABR

See available bit rate

ACAP

See adjacent channel alternate polarization

access control list

A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource.

ACL

See access control list

adaptive modulation

A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.

ADC

See analog to digital converter

add/drop multiplexer

Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Address Resolution Protocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.

adjacent channel alternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM

See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit

The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.

AF

See assured forwarding

aggregation

A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

B-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

AIS

B Glossary

See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading

The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm Filtering

An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm suppression

A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board.

AM

See adaptive modulation

analog to digital converter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS

See automatic protection switching

ARP

See Address Resolution Protocol

assured forwarding

One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATM

See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM PVC

ATM permanent virtual circuit

ATPC

See automatic transmit power control

attenuator

A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

AU

See administrative unit

automatic protection switching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatic transmit power control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver

available bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

B backward defect indication

When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth

A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

base station controller

A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. basic input/output system

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

BDI

See backward defect indication

BE

See best effort

BER

See bit error rate

best effort

A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.

binding strap

The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).

BIOS

See basic input/output system

BIP

See bit interleaved parity

bit error

An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate

Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parity

A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.

BPDU

See bridge protocol data unit

B-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

bridge protocol data unit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

broadcast

A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.

BSC

See base station controller

BTS

See base transceiver station

buffer

A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

C cable tie

The tape used to bind the cables.

cable tray

N/A

cable trough

N/A

CAR

See committed access rate

CBR

See constant bit rate

CBS

See committed burst size

CC

See connectivity check

CCC

See circuit cross connect

CCDP

See co-channel dual polarization

CCM

See continuity check message

CE

See customer edge

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. CES

See circuit emulation service

CF

See compact flash

CGMP

See Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel

A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

CIR

See committed information rate

circuit cross connect

An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.

circuit emulation service

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.

Cisco Group Management Protocol

N/A

CIST

See common and internal spanning tree

CIST root

A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.

clock tracing

The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.

co-channel dual polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization.

coarse wavelength division multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

colored packet

A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.

committed access rate

A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.

committed burst size

committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree

The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.

compact flash

Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure.

concatenation

A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

connectivity check

Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

B-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

constant bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

continuity check message

CCM is used to detect the link status.

corrugated pipe

Used to protect optical fibers.

CPU

See central processing unit

CRC

See cyclic redundancy check

cross polarization interference cancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

customer edge

A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM

See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancy check

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D data communication network

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).

data communications channel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

Datagram

A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram.

DC

See direct current

DC-C

See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C

DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C

See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-I

See DC-return isolate (with ground)

DC-return common (with ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return common (with ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC

See data communications channel

DCN

See data communication network

DDF

See digital distribution frame

DDN

See digital data network

DE

See discard eligible

differentiated services

A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.

differentiated services code point

A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.

DiffServ

See differentiated services

digital data network

A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.

digital distribution frame

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital modulation

A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.

direct current

Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

discard eligible

A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.

DS boundary node

A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable.

DS domain

In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.

DS interior node

A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.

DS node

A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP

See differentiated services code point

B-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP

See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E E-Aggr

See Ethernet aggregation

E-LAN

See Ethernet LAN

E-Line

See Ethernet line

E-Tree

See Ethernet-tree

EBS

See excess burst size

ECC

See embedded control channel

EF

See expedited forwarding

electromagnetic compatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagnetic interference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge

The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

embedded control channel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.

EMC

See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI

See electromagnetic interference

Engineering label

A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

EPL

See Ethernet private line

EPLAN

See Ethernet private LAN service

equalization

A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS

See Ethernet ring protection switching

ESD

See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack

Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

Ethernet

A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Ethernet

A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-9

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

Ethernet aggregation

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet LAN

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet line

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet private LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line

A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet ring protection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

Ethernet virtual private LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet virtual private line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet-tree

An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection.

ETS

European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI

See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

European Telecommunications Standards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

EVPL

See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN

See Ethernet virtual private LAN service

excess burst size

A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Exercise Switching

An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed.

expansion

Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thus expanding the capacity of the storage system.

expedited forwarding

The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

B-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

B.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F failure

If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected.

fast Ethernet

Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers).

fast link pulse

The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FD

See frequency diversity

FDI

See forward defect indication

FE

See fast Ethernet

FEC

See forward error correction

FFD

fast failure detection

fiber patch cord

A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.

field programmable gate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.

FIFO

See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol

A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out

A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Forced switch

For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward defect indication

Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

forward error correction

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-11

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

Forwarding plane

Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.

FPGA

See field programmable gate array

fragment

Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.

Fragmentation

Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet.

frame

A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.

frequency diversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP

See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex

A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.

G gateway network element

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer

GE

See gigabit Ethernet

generic framing procedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP

See generic framing procedure

gigabit Ethernet

GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global Positioning System

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users.

GNE

See gateway network element

GPS

See Global Positioning System

B-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS

See generic traffic shaping

GUI

See graphical user interface

guide rail

Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H HA

See high availability

half-duplex

A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying.

HDLC

See high level data link control

hierarchical quality of service

A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.

high availability

Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module.

high level data link control

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header.

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology.

higher order path

In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers.

Hold priority

The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

hop

A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot standby

A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system.

HP

See higher order path

HQoS

See hierarchical quality of service

HSB

See hot standby

HSDPA

See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-13

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

HSM

hitless switch mode

HTB

high tributary bus

hybrid radio

The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.

I ICMP

See Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU

See indoor unit

IEC

See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE

See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF

See Internet Engineering Task Force

IF

See intermediate frequency

IGMP

See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP snooping

A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IMA

See inverse multiplexing over ATM

indoor unit

The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Inloop

A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System

The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree

A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.

International Electrotechnical Commission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.

International Organization for Standardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.

B-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet Control Message Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet Engineering Task Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet Group Management Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol

The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet protocol version 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Internet protocol version 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

inverse multiplexing over ATM

The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.

IP

See Internet Protocol

IPV6

See Internet protocol version 6

IPv6

See Internet protocol version 6

IS-IS

See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol

ISO

See International Organization for Standardization

IST

See internal spanning tree

ITU-T

See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-15

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

J Jitter

Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

B.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L L2VPN

See Layer 2 virtual private network

label switched path

A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

label switching router

Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.

LACP

See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG

See link aggregation group

LAN

See local area network

LAN

See local area network

LAPS

link access protocol-SDH

Laser

A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.

layer 2 switch

A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB

See loopback

LCAS

See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCT

local craft terminal

line rate

The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

line rate forwarding

The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

B-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Protection

Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.

LMSP

linear multiplex section protection

local area network

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

local area network

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching

When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel.

LOF

See Loss Of Frame

LOM

loss of multiframe

loopback

A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP

See loss of pointer

LOS

See Loss Of Signal

Loss Of Frame

A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

loss of pointer

Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal

Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal.

LP

lower order path

LPT

link-state pass through

LSP

See label switched path

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-17

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

LSR

See label switching router

M MA

See maintenance association

MAC

See media access control

MAC

See media access control

MADM

multiple add/drop multiplexer

main topology

A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenance association

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.

maintenance association end point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

maintenance domain

The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point

Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

management information base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.

manual switch

Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS

maximum burst size

MCF

See message communication function

MD

See maintenance domain

MDI

See medium dependent interface

Mean Time Between Failures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.

Mean Time To Repair

The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

B-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

medium dependent interface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission.

MEP

See maintenance association end point

MEP

maintenance end point

message communication function

The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs.

MIB

See management information base

MIP

maintenance intermediate point

mounting ear

A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.

MP

See maintenance point

MPID

maintenance point identification

MPLS

See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MPLS L2VPN

The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.

MPLS OAM

The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.

MPLS TE

See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-19

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

MPLS TE tunnel

In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object.

MS

See multiplex section

MSP

See multiplex section protection

MSTP

See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF

See Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR

See Mean Time To Repair

MTU

See maximum transmission unit

Multicast

A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex section

The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.

multiplex section protection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.

Multiprotocol Label Switching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.

multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

N/A

N N+1 protection

A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel.

NE

See network element

NE Explorer

The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

B-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

network element

B Glossary

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.

Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network to network interface

An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.

next hop

The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination.

NLP

normal link pulse

NMS

See Network Management System

NNI

See network to network interface

node

A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.

Node Protection

A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR.

non-gateway network element

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE

See non-gateway network element

NSAP

See network service access point

NSF

not stop forwarding

O OAM

See operation, administration and maintenance

ODF

See optical distribution frame

ODU

See outdoor unit

OM

Operation and maintenance

One-to-One Backup

A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR.

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-21

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

Open Systems Interconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation, administration and maintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.

optic fiber connector

A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector).+

optical distribution frame

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

orderwire

A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI

See Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF

See open shortest path first

outdoor unit

The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

Outloop

A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals.

Output optical power

The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

B.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P packet switched network

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case

A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path

A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects.

PBS

See peak burst size

PCB

See printed circuit board

B-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

PCI bus

PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.

PDH

See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDU

See protocol data unit

PE

See provider edge

peak burst size

A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate

A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate.

penultimate hop popping

Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).

per-hop behavior

IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

PHB

See per-hop behavior

PHP

See penultimate hop popping

PIR

See peak information rate

plesiochronous digital hierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization

A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Power box

A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP

See Point-to-Point Protocol

PQ

See priority queue

PRBS

See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC

primary reference clock

printed circuit board

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-23

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

priority queue

An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it

protection ground cable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path

A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol data unit

It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.

provider edge

A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire

An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSN

See packet switched network

PTN

packet transport network

PW

See pseudo wire

PWE3

See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q QinQ

A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

QoS

See quality of service

QPSK

See quadrature phase shift keying

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.

B-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

quality of service

B Glossary

A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.

R radio frequency

A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current.

radio network controller

A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.

RDI

See remote defect indication

received signal level

The signal level at a receiver input terminal.

Received Signal Strength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

Receiver Sensitivity

Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).

RED

See random early detection

Reed-Solomon-Code

A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site.

REI

See remote error indication

remote defect indication

A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-25

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

Resource Reservation Protocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

reverse pressure

A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate.

RF

See radio frequency

RFC

See Request For Comments

RIP

See Routing Information Protocol

RMON

remote network monitoring

RMON

remote network monitoring

RNC

See radio network controller

Root alarm

An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm.

route

A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

route table

A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table.

Routing Information Protocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

routing table

A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

RSL

See received signal level

RSSI

See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP

See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP

See Resource Reservation Protocol

RTN

radio transmission node

S SD

See space diversity

SDH

See synchronous digital hierarchy

SEMF

See synchronous equipment management function

B-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service Level Agreement *

A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure.

SES

See severely errored second

Setup Priority

The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction). SF

See signal fail

SFP

See small form-factor pluggable

side trough

The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet.

signal cable

Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.

signal fail

A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio

The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple Network Management Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

simplex

Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.

SLA

See service level agreement

SLA*

See Service Level Agreement *

Slicing

To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.

small form-factor pluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC

See subnetwork connection

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-27

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

SNCP

See subnetwork connection protection

SNMP

See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR

See signal to noise ratio

space diversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM

See Synchronization Status Message

static virtual circuit

Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM

See Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1

See synchronous transport mode-1

STM-N

See synchronous transport module of order N

STP

See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network

Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management.

subnet mask

The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC

See static virtual circuit

switch

To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

B-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronous digital hierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronous equipment management function

The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.

synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64. module of order N

T tail drop

A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.

Tail drop

A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.

TCI

tag control information

TCP

See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM

See time division multiplexing

TE

See traffic engineering

TEDB

See traffic engineering database

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-29

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

TIM

trace identifier mismatch

time division multiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.

time to live

A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TMN

See Telecommunication Management Network

ToS priority

A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.

TPS

See tributary protection switch

traffic engineering

A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.

traffic engineering database

TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network.

Traffic shaping

It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.

Transmission Control Protocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.

tributary protection switch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

trTCM

See two rate three color marker

TTL

See time to live

TU

tributary unit

Tunnel

A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.

B-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

two rate three color marker

B Glossary

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.

B.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U U-VLAN

A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.

UAS

unavailable second

UBR

See unspecified bit rate

UDP

See User Datagram Protocol

underfloor cabling

The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI

See user network interface

unicast

The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

unspecified bit rate

No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.

upload

An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.

User Datagram Protocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).

V V-UNI

See virtual user-network interface

variable bit rate

One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

VBR

See variable bit rate

VC

See virtual container

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-31

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

VCC

See virtual channel connection

VCG

See virtual concatenation group

VCI

See virtual channel identifier

VCTRUNK

A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board

virtual channel connection

The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.

virtual channel identifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination.

virtual concatenation group

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link

virtual container

The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.

virtual local area network

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier

The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs.

virtual private LAN service

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual route forward

VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device.

virtual user-network interface

A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS.

VLAN

See virtual local area network

voice over IP

An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP

See voice over IP

VPI

See virtual path identifier

VPLS

See virtual private LAN service

VPN

See virtual private network

VRF

See virtual route forward

B-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (Web LCT)

B Glossary

W wait to restore

The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.

WAN

See wide area network

Web LCT

The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network

weighted fair queuing

A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ

See weighted fair queuing

wide area network

A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country.

winding pipe

A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

WRED

See weighted random early detection

WRR

See weighted round Robin

WTR

See wait to restore

X XPIC

Issue 02 (2011-01-20)

See cross polarization interference cancellation

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-33